Programmable Terminal

NA-series
Software

User’s Manual

NA5-15101 (-V1)
NA5-12101 (-V1)
NA5-9001 (-V1)
NA5-7001 (-V1)
NA-RTLD

V118-E1-25
 NOTE
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Neverthe-
less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages
resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Trademarks
• Sysmac and SYSMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other
countries for OMRON factory automation products.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Excel, and Visual Basic are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
• ODVA, CIP, CompoNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.

• The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

• Portions of this software are copyright 2014 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
• Celeron, Intel, Intel Core and Intel Atom are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and / or other countries.

Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.

Copyrights
Microsoft product screen shots used with permission from Microsoft.
 Introduction

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing an NA-series Programmable Terminal.
This manual contains information that is necessary to use the NA-series Programmable Terminal.
Please read this manual and make sure you understand the functionality and performance of the
NA-series Programmable Terminal before you attempt to use it in a control system.
Keep this manual in a safe place where it will be available for reference during operation.

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical sys-
tems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and maintaining FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

Applicable Products
This manual covers the following products.
• NA-series Programmable Terminals*1
*1. Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions for the NA5-W apply to the NA5-U as
well.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1

 Relevant Manuals

Relevant Manuals
The basic information required to use an NA-series PT is provided in the following four manuals.
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. V117)
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Hardware(-V1) User’s Manual (Cat. No. V125)
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118)
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119)
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Soft-NA User’s Manual (Cat. No. V126)

Operations are performed from the Sysmac Studio Automation Software.

Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for information on the Sys-
mac Studio.

Other manuals are necessary for specific system configurations and applications.

The following manual is also available to walk you through installations and operations up to starting
actual operation using simple examples.
Refer to it as required.
• NA-series Programmable Terminal Startup Guide Manual (Cat. No. V120)

2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Manual Structure

Manual Structure

Page Structure and Markings

The following page structure is used in this manual.

3 Installation and Wiring Level 1 heading

Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading 3-3 Installing NA-series PTs Level 3 heading
Give the current
headings.
Level 3 heading 3-3-1 Installation in a Control Panel

3-3 Installing NA-series PTs

Installation in a Control Panel
The NA-series PT is installed by embedding it in a control panel. Panel Mounting Brackets and a Phillips screwdriver are
required to mount the NA-series PT. The required number of Panel Mounting Brackets are included with the NA-series PT.

3 Page tab
Panel Mounting Bracket Phillips screwdriver
Gives the number
Use the following installation procedure.

3-3-1 Installation in a Control Panel

of the main section.
A step in a procedure 1 Open a hole in which to embed the NA-series PT with the following dimensions and insert the
NA-series PT from the front side of the panel.
Indicates a procedure.
Vertical

Horizontal

Recommended panel thickness: 1.6 to 6.0 mm

Model Dimensions
NA5-15W 392 +1/-0 × 268 +1/-0 mm (horizontal × vertical)
NA5-12W 310 +1/-0 × 221 +1/-0 mm (horizontal × vertical)
NA5-9W 261 +1/-0 × 166 +1/-0 mm (horizontal × vertical)
NA5-7W 197 + 0.5/-0 × 141 +0.5/-0 mm (horizontal × vertical)

Special information Additional Information

You can use an NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable to extend the USB slave connector on the
Icons indicate precautions, back panel of the NA-series PT to the front surface of a control panel. If you use the USB Relay
Cable, open a hole with the following dimensions and install the Cable.
additional information, or
reference information. 2 Attach the panel mounting brackets from the back of the panel as shown in the following figure.
The number of mounting brackets depends on the size of the NA-series PT, as shown in the following
table. Refer to Bracket Mounting Locations for Different NA-series PT Sizes on page 3-8, below.

Model Number of Panel Mounting Brackets

NA5-15W 8 locations
NA5-12W 6 locations
NA5-9W 4 locations
NA5-7W 4 locations
Catch the brackets in the mounting holes in the NA-series PT, pull forward lightly, and then use
a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws and secure the NA-series PT to the panel, which will
be held between the mounting brackets and the NA-series PT.

Manual name NA Series Programmable Terminal Hardware User’s Manual (V117) 3-5

Note This illustration is provided only as a sample. It may not literally appear in this manual.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3

 Manual Structure

Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure safe usage of the product.

Precautions for Correct Use

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and perfor-
mance.

Additional Information

Additional information to read as required.

This information is provided to increase understanding or make operation easier.

Version Information

Information on differences in specifications and functionality with different versions is given.

4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Sections in this Manual

Sections in this Manual

1 10

2 11
Introduction to the NA-series Connecting to HMIs
1 Programmable Terminals 10 from External Devices
3 A
Basic Sysmac Studio
2 Operations 11 Other Functions
4 I
HMI Configuration
3 and Setup A Appendices
5

Creating the HMI

4 Application I Index 6

7
5 Objects

8
6 Connecting to the HMI

9
7 Debugging

8 Synchronizing Projects

9 Reusing Objects

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5

 Sections in this Manual

6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 CONTENTS

CONTENTS
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1

Relevant Manuals..................................................................................................... 2

Manual Structure...................................................................................................... 3

Sections in this Manual ........................................................................................... 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement ....................................................................... 13

Safety Precautions................................................................................................. 15

Precautions for Safe Use ...................................................................................... 19

Precautions for Correct Use ................................................................................. 22

Regulations and Standards .................................................................................. 23

Related Manuals..................................................................................................... 24

Terminology............................................................................................................ 34

Revision History..................................................................................................... 35

Section 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-1 NA-series Programmable Terminals .................................................................................... 1-2
1-1-1 Features...................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2 How HMIs Operate................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-2-1 HMI Software Configuration........................................................................................................ 1-4
1-2-2 HMI Projects ............................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-3 Pages ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-4 Objects........................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1-2-5 Memory Specifications for Connected Devices .......................................................................... 1-6
1-2-6 Events......................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1-2-7 Subroutines................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1-2-8 Functions Shared by the Entire HMI Project............................................................................... 1-9
1-2-9 Data That Retained When Power Is Turned OFF....................................................................... 1-9
1-3 Operating Procedure for HMIs ........................................................................................... 1-10
1-3-1 Overall Procedure..................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-3-2 Procedure Details ......................................................................................................................1-11

Section 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-1 Parts of the Sysmac Studio Window ................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1 Application Window .................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-2 Menu Command Structure.................................................................................................... 2-7
2-3 Basic Editing Operations.................................................................................................... 2-10

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7

 CONTENTS

2-4 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations .......................................................................... 2-12

2-4-1 Setting Parameters ................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-4-2 Programming............................................................................................................................. 2-12
2-4-3 Library Functions....................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-4-4 Operations for Debugging ......................................................................................................... 2-13
2-4-5 Communications ....................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-4-6 Security Measures .................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-4-7 Online Help ............................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-4-8 Project Management Functions ................................................................................................ 2-14
2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects..................................................................................... 2-15
2-5-1 Creating a Project File from the Start Page............................................................................... 2-15
2-5-2 Adding an HMI to an Existing Project........................................................................................ 2-16
2-5-3 Changing Devices ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
2-5-4 Importing and Exporting Devices .............................................................................................. 2-19

Section 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-1 Outline of Configurations and Setup ................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1 Connected Device Registration and Variable Mapping............................................................... 3-2
3-2 Device References................................................................................................................. 3-3
3-2-1 Types of Connected Devices ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3-2-2 Connected Devices in the Current Project .................................................................................. 3-3
3-2-3 Registering External Connected Devices.................................................................................... 3-4
3-3 Mapping Variables ................................................................................................................. 3-7
3-3-1 Mapping Variables....................................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-2 Opening the Variable Mapping Tab Page and Tab Page Parts ................................................... 3-7
3-3-3 Variable Mapping Methods.......................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3-4 When a Variable Mapping Error Cannot be Resolved ................................................................ 3-9
3-4 HMI Settings......................................................................................................................... 3-11
3-4-1 HMI Settings.............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-4-2 Device Settings ......................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-4-3 TCP/IP Settings......................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-4-4 FTP Settings ............................................................................................................................. 3-15
3-4-5 NTP Settings ............................................................................................................................. 3-16
3-4-6 FINS Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-17
3-4-7 VNC Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-18
3-4-8 Printing Settings ........................................................................................................................ 3-19
3-4-9 Serial Port Settings ................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-5 Security Settings ................................................................................................................. 3-21
3-6 Troubleshooter .................................................................................................................... 3-22
3-7 Language Settings .............................................................................................................. 3-23
3-8 Operation Log Settings....................................................................................................... 3-25
3-9 HMI Clock ............................................................................................................................. 3-28
3-10 Updating the HMI Name ...................................................................................................... 3-29
3-11 Write Protecting the HMI ..................................................................................................... 3-30
3-12 Clear All Memory ................................................................................................................. 3-31
3-13 Resetting the HMI ................................................................................................................ 3-32

8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 CONTENTS

Section 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1 Registering Variables ............................................................................................................ 4-3
4-1-1 Variables ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-1-2 Registering Global Variables ...................................................................................................... 4-4
4-1-3 Registering External Variables.................................................................................................... 4-6
4-1-4 Searching for Unused Variables ................................................................................................4-11
4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global Variables ................................................................... 4-12
4-1-6 System-defined Variables ......................................................................................................... 4-16
4-1-7 Subroutine Variables................................................................................................................. 4-20
4-2 Registering Data Types ....................................................................................................... 4-21
4-3 Creating Pages .................................................................................................................... 4-22
4-3-1 Displaying Pages ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
4-3-2 Registering Pages .................................................................................................................... 4-23
4-3-3 Page Property Settings............................................................................................................. 4-25
4-3-4 Editing Pages............................................................................................................................ 4-27
4-4 Setting Common Object Functions ................................................................................... 4-35
4-4-1 Registering User Alarms........................................................................................................... 4-35
4-4-2 Setting Controller Events .......................................................................................................... 4-36
4-4-3 Registration for Data Logging ................................................................................................... 4-39
4-4-4 Registering Data Groups .......................................................................................................... 4-40
4-4-5 Registering Recipes.................................................................................................................. 4-42
4-4-6 Registering Custom Keypads ................................................................................................... 4-44
4-4-7 Setting Global Events and Corresponding Actions................................................................... 4-46
4-4-8 Registering Global Subroutines ................................................................................................ 4-48
4-4-9 Setting Up Resources............................................................................................................... 4-49
4-4-10 Setting Up IAG Resources........................................................................................................ 4-51
4-4-11 Registering Scaling................................................................................................................... 4-52
4-5 Subroutines.......................................................................................................................... 4-55
4-5-1 Subroutine Execution................................................................................................................ 4-56
4-5-2 Precautions on Internal Processing .......................................................................................... 4-60
4-5-3 Code Editor............................................................................................................................... 4-61
4-5-4 Differences in Language Specifications.................................................................................... 4-61
4-6 Search and Replace ............................................................................................................ 4-62
4-7 Font Replacement ............................................................................................................... 4-63
4-8 IAG Replacement................................................................................................................. 4-72
4-9 Device Replacement............................................................................................................ 4-75
4-10 Cross References ................................................................................................................ 4-78
4-10-1 Cross References ..................................................................................................................... 4-78
4-11 Building ................................................................................................................................ 4-79
4-11-1 Building ..................................................................................................................................... 4-79
4-11-2 Build Operation ......................................................................................................................... 4-80
4-12 Offline Comparison ............................................................................................................. 4-81
4-13 Resource Usage .................................................................................................................. 4-82

Section 5 Objects
5-1 Objects ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1 Object List................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-2 Object Attributes ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5-1-3 Using Objects ............................................................................................................................. 5-8

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9

 CONTENTS

5-2 Examples of Using Objects ................................................................................................ 5-12

5-2-1 Displaying a PDF File................................................................................................................ 5-12
5-2-2 Displaying a User Alarm............................................................................................................ 5-14
5-2-3 Inserting a Variable Value in a User Alarm................................................................................ 5-16
5-2-4 Displaying a Trend Graph ......................................................................................................... 5-18
5-2-5 Displaying a Broken-line Graph ................................................................................................ 5-21
5-2-6 Using a Recipe.......................................................................................................................... 5-24
5-2-7 Setting the Order of Automatic Move of Input Focus ................................................................ 5-28
5-2-8 Displaying Text Strings by Indirect Addressing ......................................................................... 5-31
5-2-9 Creating Buttons with the Lamp Function ................................................................................. 5-33
5-2-10 Creating Buttons to Output Operation Log Files ....................................................................... 5-35

Section 6 Connecting to the HMI

6-1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2 Going Online with an HMI ..................................................................................................... 6-3
6-2-1 Methods for Going Online with an HMI ....................................................................................... 6-3
6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method................................................................................................... 6-4
6-2-3 Online Connection....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method................................................................. 6-6
6-2-5 Going Offline ............................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs .................................................................................................................. 6-7

Section 7 Debugging
7-1 HMI Debugging Functions .................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-1 Watch Tab Page.......................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-1-2 Breakpoints ................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7-1-3 Step Execution ............................................................................................................................ 7-5
7-1-4 Simulator Functions .................................................................................................................... 7-8
7-1-5 Offline Debugging with Only the HMI Simulator.......................................................................... 7-9
7-1-6 Offline Debugging with the Controller Simulator ....................................................................... 7-10

Section 8 Synchronizing Projects

8-1 Synchronizing Projects......................................................................................................... 8-2
8-2 Downloading .......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8-2-1 Downloading While Online .......................................................................................................... 8-6
8-2-2 Downloading by Using the Download Function........................................................................... 8-7
8-2-3 Using Storage Media for Downloading........................................................................................ 8-8
8-3 Uploading ............................................................................................................................. 8-11
8-3-1 Uploading Projects Online......................................................................................................... 8-11
8-3-2 Uploading with the Upload Function ......................................................................................... 8-13
8-3-3 Uploading with Storage Media .................................................................................................. 8-14
8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices......................................................................................................... 8-18

Section 9 Reusing Objects

9-1 Reusing Objects .................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-2 IAGs ........................................................................................................................................ 9-3
9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected ............................................................................. 9-3
9-2-2 Creating an IAG ........................................................................................................................ 9-10
9-2-3 Using IAGs ................................................................................................................................ 9-13

10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 CONTENTS

9-3 Custom Objects ................................................................................................................... 9-16

9-3-1 Objects That You Can Register as Custom Objects ................................................................. 9-16
9-3-2 Creating Custom Objects.......................................................................................................... 9-16
9-3-3 Deleting Custom Objects .......................................................................................................... 9-19
9-3-4 Using Custom Objects .............................................................................................................. 9-20

Section 10 Connecting to HMIs from External Devices

10-1 Accessing an HMI from an External Device...................................................................... 10-2
10-1-1 VNC .......................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10-1-2 FTP ........................................................................................................................................... 10-3

Section 11 Other Functions

11-1 Sysmac Studio Option Settings ......................................................................................... 11-2
11-2 Printing ................................................................................................................................. 11-5
11-2-1 Printable Items...........................................................................................................................11-5
11-3 Image File Output ................................................................................................................ 11-6
11-4 Import/Export User Alarm................................................................................................... 11-7
11-4-1 Importing User Alarms ...............................................................................................................11-7
11-4-2 Exporting User Alarms...............................................................................................................11-9
11-4-3 File Format............................................................................................................................... 11-11
11-5 Import/Export Resources.................................................................................................. 11-13
11-5-1 Importing Resources................................................................................................................11-13
11-5-2 Exporting Resources ...............................................................................................................11-16
11-5-3 File Format...............................................................................................................................11-19
11-6 Import/Export Object Properties ...................................................................................... 11-20
11-6-1 Importing Object Properties .....................................................................................................11-20
11-6-2 Exporting Object Properties.....................................................................................................11-21
11-6-3 File Format...............................................................................................................................11-22
11-7 Importing/Exporting Pages............................................................................................... 11-24
11-7-1 Importing Pages.......................................................................................................................11-24
11-7-2 Exporting Pages ......................................................................................................................11-25

Appendices
A-1 Events and Actions ...............................................................................................................A-2
A-2 Supported Formats ...............................................................................................................A-5
A-3 Specifications of User Alarm Log Files ...............................................................................A-7
A-4 Specifications of Data Log Files ..........................................................................................A-8
A-5 Specifications of Operation Log Files .................................................................................A-9
A-6 Differences between the Physical HMI and Simulator .....................................................A-12
A-7 Version Upgrade History.....................................................................................................A-13
A-7-1 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio and Runtime ....................................................... A-13
A-7-2 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio Only .................................................................... A-17
A-7-3 Sysmac Studio Corresponding Versions .................................................................................. A-21
A-7-4 Runtime Support Limit .............................................................................................................. A-22
A-8 Precautions for Version Upgrades.....................................................................................A-23

Index

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11

 CONTENTS

12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Terms and Conditions Agreement

Terms and Conditions Agreement

Warranty, Limitations of Liability

Warranties
 Exclusive Warranty
Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workman-
ship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in
writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.

 Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF
THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based
on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.

 Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally
shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-com-
plying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal
to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be
responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products
unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and
maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of
any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies
shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combi-
nation with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materi-
als or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.

See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

Limitation on Liability; Etc

OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on
which liability is asserted.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 13

 Terms and Conditions Agreement

Application Considerations

Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations
which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At
Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings
and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a com-
plete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, sys-
tem, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take applica-
tion responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE
HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS
PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIP-
MENT OR SYSTEM.

Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or
any consequence thereof.

Disclaimers

Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for
the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of
Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual perfor-
mance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or
when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.

Errors and Omissions

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; how-
ever, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions

Definition of Precautionary Information

The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of
the NA-series Programmable Terminal. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely impor-
tant to safety. Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.
The following notation is used.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

WARNING
not avoided, could result in mild or moderate injury or
at the worst, serious injury or death. Additionally,
there may be severe property damage.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Caution avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or

property damage.

Precautions for Safe Use

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure safe usage of the product.

Precautions for Correct Use

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.

Symbols

The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you must not do.
The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.
This example indicates prohibiting disassembly.

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including warnings).

The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text.
This example indicates a general precaution.

The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you must do.
The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.
This example shows a general precaution for something that you must do.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 15

 Safety Precautions

Warnings

WARNING
Do not attempt to take the NA Unit apart and do not touch the product inside while the
power is being supplied. Otherwise it may result in electric shock.

Always ensure that the personnel in charge confirm that installation, inspection, and
maintenance were properly performed for the NA Unit. “Personnel in charge” refers to
individuals qualified and responsible for ensuring safety during machine design,
installation, operation, maintenance, and disposal.
Ensure that installation and post-installation checks are performed by personnel in charge
who possess a thorough understanding of the machinery to be installed.

Do not use the input functions such as the touch panel or function keys of the NA Unit, in
applications that involve human life, in applications that may result in serious injury, or for
emergency stop switches.

Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the NA Unit. It may cause NA Unit to lose
its safety function.

Never press two points or more on the touch panel of the NA Unit at a time. Touching two
points or more interrupts normal touch panel operations.

To conform to UL Type 4X standards, always use the NA5-W (-V1) with a

High-pressure Waterproof Attachment (PWA). If you do not use a PWA, there is a risk of
water entry, which may cause severe equipment damage.
Always pay attention to the inside dimensions when you mount a PWA on the
NA5-W (-V1). If you do not mount the PWA correctly, there is a risk of water
entry, which may cause severe equipment damage.

16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Safety Precautions

Security Measures
Anti-virus protection
Install the latest commercial-quality antivirus software on the computer connected to the control
system and maintain to keep the software up-to-date.

Security measures to prevent unauthorized access

Take the following measures to prevent unauthorized access to our products.
• Install physical controls so that only authorized personnel can access control systems and
equipment.
• Reduce connections to control systems and equipment via networks to prevent access from
untrusted devices.
• Install firewalls to shut down unused communications ports and limit communications hosts and
isolate control systems and equipment from the IT network.
• Use a virtual private network (VPN) for remote access to control systems and equipment.
• Adopt multifactor authentication to devices with remote access to control systems and equip-
ment.
• Set strong passwords and change them frequently.
• Scan virus to ensure safety of USB drives or other external storages before connecting them to
control systems and equipment.

Data input and output protection

Validate backups and ranges to cope with unintentional modification of input/output data to control
systems and equipment.
• Checking the scope of data
• Checking validity of backups and preparing data for restore in case of falsification and abnormal-
ities
• Safety design, such as emergency shutdown and fail-soft operation in case of data tampering
and abnormalities

Data recovery
Backup data and keep the data up-to-date periodically to prepare for data loss.

When using an intranet environment through a global address, connecting to an unauthorized ter-
minal such as a SCADA, HMI or to an unauthorized server may result in network security issues
such as spoofing and tampering. You must take sufficient measures such as restricting access to
the terminal, using a terminal equipped with a secure function, and locking the installation area by
yourself.

When constructing an intranet, communication failure may occur due to cable disconnection or the
influence of unauthorized network equipment. Take adequate measures, such as restricting physi-
cal access to network devices, by means such as locking the installation area.

When using a device equipped with the SD Memory Card function, there is a security risk that a
third party may acquire, alter, or replace the files and data in the removable media by removing the
removable media or unmounting the removable media.
Please take sufficient measures, such as restricting physical access to the Controller or taking
appropriate management measures for removable media, by means of locking the installation
area, entrance management, etc., by yourself.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 17

 Safety Precautions

Precaution

WARNING
Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the NA5-W-V1.

The internal power supply in the NA5-W-V1 is a non-isolated DC power supply. Never
ground the 24 V side. If the 24 V power supply to the NA is grounded positively, a short circuit will
occur as shown below and may result in damage to the device.

24 V Grounding Power Supply

NA5-W-V1

Power External
Supply non-isolated
24 V Internal device
+ Fuse non-isolated
power PC
supply Shielded USB memory device
0V GND Fuse SG cable SG

Protective ground
Hood Hood
Functional ground

Grounding
Grounding

NA5-W-V1 grounding diagram

Non-isolated
power
supply

Serial USB slave

connector connector
Ethernet hood hood
connector
hood USB host
connector
24 VDC PE (Protective ground) hood
GND FG (Functional ground)

Additional Information

The internal power supply of the NA5-W Product uses an isolated DC power sup-
ply, and therefore is not susceptible to the effects of grounding of the 24 V side.

18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Safe Use

• When unpacking the NA Unit, check carefully for any external scratches or other damages. Also,
shake the NA Unit gently and check for any abnormal sound.
• The NA Unit must be installed in a control panel.
• To conform to UL Type 1 standards, the mounting panel thickness must be 1.6 to 6.0 mm.
To conform to UL Type 4X standards, the thickness must be 1.6 to 4.5 mm.
To conform to UL Type 4X standards, always use the NA5-W (-V1) with a High-pressure
Waterproof Attachment (PWA). If you do not use a PWA, there is a risk of water entry, which may
cause severe equipment damage. Do not use the NA Unit outdoors. Tighten the Mounting Brackets
evenly to a torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 N·m to maintain water and dust resistance. If the tightening
torque exceeds the specified value, or the tightening is not even, deformation of the front panel may
occur. What is more, make sure the panel is not dirty or warped, that the front surface is smooth, and
that the panel is strong enough to hold the NA Unit.
• Do not let metal particles enter the NA Unit when preparing the panel.
• Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables.
• Periodically check the installation conditions in applications where the NA Unit is subject to contact
with oil or water.
• Be certain to use the cables with lock mechanism such as serial cable or the Ethernet cable after
confirming if it is securely locked.
• Do not touch the packaging part of the circuit board with your bare hands. Discharge any static elec-
tricity from your body before handling the board.
• Do not use volatile solvents such as benzene and thinners or chemical cloths.
• Water and oil resistance will be lost if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off. Do not use the NA Unit,
if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off.
• As the rubber packing will deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment,
periodical inspection is necessary.
• Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply, or pressing the reset
switch.
• The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF. Turn ON/OFF
the power supply according to the specified procedure.
• Operate DIP switch according to the following way.
Correct technique Incorrect technique

Back of the case

DIP switch
The DIP switch may break if it is levered with a tool against the case as shown in the figure.
• Once the DIP switch settings are changed, reset by pressing the reset switch, or restart the power
supply.
• Initialize the project, after confirming that existing project is backed up at the Sysmac Studio.
• When changing the password, do not reset or turn OFF the power supply until the writing is com-
pleted. A failure to store the password may cause the project to fail to function.
• While uploading or downloading a project or a system program, do not perform the operations as fol-
lows. Such operations may corrupt the project or the system program:
• Turning OFF the power supply of the NA Unit
• Resetting the NA Unit.
• Removing the USB devices or SD card.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 19

 Precautions for Safe Use

• Disconnecting the cable between a support tool and the NA Unit.

• Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power terminals.
• Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
• Use a DC power with a slight voltage fluctuation and that will provide a stable output even if the input
is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms. Also use the one with reinforced insulation or double insulation.
Rated Power Supply Voltage: 24 VDC (Allowable range 19.2 to 28.8 VDC)
• Use a power cable with AWG#12 to #22 thick (0.35 mm2 to 3.31 mm2). Peel the coating 7 mm length
and tighten the terminal screw with the torque in the range of 0.5 to 0.6 N·m. Also confirm if the termi-
nal screw is tighten appropriately.
• Ground the NA Unit correctly.
• When using the NA5-W-V1, to help prevent electrical shock, ground to 100 Ω or less by
using dedicated ground wires (with cross-section area of 2 mm2 or larger) and tighten the terminal
screw on the protective ground terminal to a torque of 1.0 to 1.2 N·m.
• Do not use any battery if strong impact is applied to it (e.g. by dropping on the floor) because such a
battery may cause a leakage.
• Confirm the type of the battery to install the battery properly.
• Apply power for at least five minutes before changing the battery. Mount a new battery within five
minutes after turning OFF the power supply. If power is not supplied for at least five minutes, the
clock data may be lost. Check the clock data after changing the battery.
• Do not dismantle a battery nor let it short-circuit.
• Do not apply an impact with the lithium battery, charge it, dispose it into a fire, or heat it. Doing either
of them may cause an ignition or a bursting.
• Dispose of the NA Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.

• The following precaution must be displayed on all products containing lithium primary batteries with a
perchlorate content of 6 ppb or higher when exporting them to or shipping them through California,
USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The NA-Series contains a lithium primary battery with a perchlorate content of 6 ppb or higher. When
exporting a product containing the NA-Series to or shipping such a product through California, USA,
label all packing and shipping containers appropriately.
• Do not connect the USB devices in the environment subject to the strong vibration.
• Use a USB memory device for temporary purposes such as data transfer.
• Do not connect USB devices which are not allowed to connect to NA Unit.
• Start actual system application only after checking normal operation of the system including storage
devices such as USB memory and SD card.
• When connecting peripheral devices which do not meet the performance level of the NA Unit for
noise and static electricity, ensure sufficient countermeasures against noise and static electricity dur-
ing installation of the peripheral devices to the NA Unit.
• Do not carry out the following operations when accessing USB devices or SD card:
• Turning OFF the power supply of the NA Unit
• Press the Reset switch of the NA Unit
• Pull out the USB devices or SD card
• When using the No. 6 pin of the serial port connector for a voltage of DC+5 V, make sure the supply
equipment's current capacity is below 250 mA before using it. The DC+5 V voltage output of the NA
Unit is +5 V±5%, and the maximum current is 250 mA.

20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Precautions for Safe Use

• To ensure the system's safety, make sure to incorporate a program that call periodically signals dur-
ing the operation at connected device side and can confirm the normal functionality of the NA Unit
before running the system.
• Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking project, subroutine and the operation of
the program at the connected device side.
• To execute a subroutine with multiple threads, fully check the operation of the program that takes
multithreads into consideration, before starting actual system application.
• To use numeric input functions safely, always make maximum and minimum limit settings.
• Do not press the touch panel with a force greater than 30 N.
• Do not use hard or pointed objects to operate or scrub the screen, otherwise the surface of the
screen may be damaged.
• The deterioration over time may cause the touch points to move on the touch panel. Calibrate the
touch panel periodically.
• A touch position detection error of approximately 20 pixels may occur due to the precision of the
touch panel. Always take this into account when positioning objects on the panel so adjoining objects
will not be activated by mistake.
• Confirm the safety of the system before pressing the touch panel.
• Do not accidentally press the touch panel when the backlight is not lit or when the display does not
appear or is too dark to identify visually.
• You can change the brightness by changing the setting such as in the system menu or by download-
ing project.
If the brightness is set to very dark, it causes flickering or unreadable screen. Additionally, the bright-
ness can be restored by transferring the project again after setting the property of the brightness
appropriately.
In a case of the applications where end users can control the brightness, create the applications so
as keeping on operations by such as assigning the function which restores the brightness to one of
function keys, if necessary.
• Signals from the touch panel may not be entered if the touch panel is pressed consecutively at high
speed. Make sure to go on the next operation after confirming that the NA Unit has detected the input
of the touch panel.
• The function keys have the restrictions as follows:
• When you use gloves or others, the function keys may not work correctly depending on the mate-
rial and thickness of the gloves. Take actual conditions of the gloves usage into considerations
prior to the system startup to perform the confirmation.
• The function keys do not work when covered with water. Remove the water completely before
use.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 21

 Precautions for Correct Use

Precautions for Correct Use

 Do not install or store the NA Unit in any of the following locations:
• Locations subject to severe changes in temperature
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of high humidity
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to strong shock or vibration
• Locations outdoors subject to direct wind and rain
• Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light
• Locations subject to dust
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to splashing oil or chemicals

 Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in

the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electric field or magnetic field
• Locations close to power supply lines
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity

 Mounting Panel
• To conform to UL Type 1 standards, the mounting panel thickness must be 1.6 to 6.0 mm.
• To conform to UL Type 4X standards, the thickness must be 1.6 to 4.5 mm.
To conform to UL Type 4X standards, always use the NA5-W (-V1) with a High-pres-
sure Waterproof Attachment (PWA). If you do not use a PWA, there is a risk of water entry, which
may cause severe equipment damage.
• Tighten the Mounting Brackets evenly to a torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 N·m to maintain water
and dust resistance. If the tightening torque exceeds the specified range or the tightening is not
even, deformation of the front panel may occur. Make sure the panel is not dirty or warped, that
the front surface is smooth, and that the panel is strong enough to hold the NA Unit.

22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Regulations and Standards

Regulations and Standards

Conformance to EMC Regulations

Concepts
NA-series PTs are industrial electrical devices that are incorporated into various types of machines
and manufacturing equipment. The products conform to the relevant standards so that the machines
and equipment incorporating the Omron products can comply with EMC Regulations more easily.

Refer to the OMRON website (www.ia.omron.com) or ask your OMRON representative for the most
recent standards to which our products conform.

To ensure that your machine or equipment complies with EMC regulations, please observe the fol-
lowing precautions.

• The NA Unit is defined as an in-panel device and must be installed within a control panel.
• NA-series PTs complies with the emission standards. For the radiated emission requirements, in
particular, please note that the actual emission varies depending on the configuration of the con-
trol panel to be used, the connected devices, and wiring methods. Therefore, customers them-
selves must confirm that the entire machine or equipment conforms to EMC regulations, even you
are using a device that conforms to EMC regulations.
• You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies connected to
the NA Unit.

Caution:
This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate
protection to radio reception in such environments.

Conformance to KC Standards
When you use this product in South Korea, observe the following precautions.

This product meets the electromagnetic compatibility requirements for business use. There is a risk of
radio interference when this product is used in home.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 23

 Related Manuals

Related Manuals
The following manuals are related to the NA-series PTs. Use these manuals for reference.

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

NA-series Program- V117 NA5-W Learning the speci- Information is provided on NA-series
mable Terminal Hard- fications and set- PT specifications, part names, instal-
ware User’s Manual tings required to lation procedures, and procedures to
install an NA-series connect an NA Unit to peripheral
PT and connect devices.
peripheral devices. Information is also provided on main-
tenance after operation and trouble-
shooting.
NA-series Program- V125 NA5-W-V1 Learning the speci- Information is provided on NA-series
mable Terminal Hard- fications and set- PT specifications, part names, instal-
ware(-V1) User’s tings required to lation procedures, and procedures to
Manual install an NA-series connect an NA Unit to peripheral
PT and connect devices.
peripheral devices. Information is also provided on main-
tenance after operation and trouble-
shooting.
NA-series Program- V118 NA5-W (-V1) Learning about NA-series PT pages and object func-
mable Terminal Soft- NA-series PT pages tions are described.
ware User’s Manual and object func-
tions.
NA-series Program- V119 NA5-W (-V1) Learning the speci- Information is provided on connec-
mable Terminal fications required tion procedures and setting proce-
Device Connection to connect devices dures to connect an NA-series PT to
User’s Manual to an NA-series PT. a Controller or other device.
NA-series Program- V126 NA-RTLD Learning about the Information is provided on the specifi-
mable Terminal procedure to install cations of the Soft-NA and differences
Soft-NA User’s Man- the Soft-NA and from the NA5 series.
ual differences from Information is also provided on main-
the NA5 series. tenance after operation and trouble-
shooting.
NA-series Program- V120 NA5-W Learning in con- The part names and installation pro-
mable Terminal crete terms infor- cedures are described followed by
Startup Guide mation required to page creation and transfer proce-
install and start the dures with the Sysmac Studio. Also
operation of an operation, maintenance, and inspec-
NA-series PT. tion procedures after the project is
transferred are described. Sample
screen captures are provided as
examples.

24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

NX-series CPU Unit W535 NX701- Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NX-series
Hardware User's specifications of system is provided along with the fol-
Manual the NX-series CPU lowing information on the CPU Unit.
Units, including • Features and system configuration
introductory infor-
• Introduction
mation, designing,
• Part names and functions
installation, and
maintenance. • General specifications
Mainly hardware • Installation and wiring
information is pro- • Maintenance and inspection
vided. Use this manual together with the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software
User's Manual (Cat. No.W501).
NJ-series CPU Unit W500 NJ501- Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Hardware User’s NJ301- specifications of NJ-series system is provided along
Manual the NJ-series CPU with the following information on a
NJ101-
Units, including Controller built with a CPU Unit.
introductory infor- • Features and system configuration
mation, designing,
• Introduction
installation, and
• Part names and functions
maintenance.
• General specifications
Mainly hardware
information is pro- • Installation and wiring
vided. • Inspection and maintenance
Use this manual together with the
NJ-series CPU Unit Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W501).
NJ/NX-series CPU W501 NX701- Learning how to Provides the following information on
Unit Software User´s NX502- program and set a Controller built with an
Manual up an NJ/NX-series CPU Unit.
NX102-
NJ/NX-series CPU • CPU Unit operation
NX1P2- Unit.
• CPU Unit features
NJ501- Mainly software • Initial settings
NJ301- information is pro-
• Programming based on IEC
NJ101- vided.
61131-3 language specifications
NJ/NX-series Instruc- W502 NX701- Learning detailed The instructions in the instruction set
tions Reference Man- NX102- specifications on (IEC 61131-3 specifications) are
ual the basic instruc- described.
NX1P2-
tions of an
NJ501- NJ/NX-series CPU
NJ301- Unit.
NJ101-
NJ/NX-series Trou- W503 NX701- Learning about the Concepts on managing errors that
bleshooting Manual NX102- errors that may be may be detected in an NJ/NX-series
detected in an Controller and information on individ-
NX1P2-
NJ/NX-series Con- ual errors are described.
NJ501- troller.
NJ301-
NJ101-

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 25

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

CJ Series Program- W393 CJ1H-CPUH-R Learning the basic The following information is provided
mable Controllers CJ1G/H-CPUH specifications of on a CJ-series PLC.
Operation Manual the CJ-series • Introduction and features
CJ1G-CPUP
PLCs, including
CJ1M-CPU • System configuration design
introductory infor-
• Installation and wiring
CJ1G-CPU mation, designing,
installation, and • I/O memory allocation
maintenance. • Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the
Programming Manual (Cat. No.
W394).
CS/CJ/NSJ Series W394 CS1G/H-CPUH Learning about the The following information is provided
Programmable Con- CS1G/H-CPU-V1 functions of the on a CS/CJ-series or NSJ-series
trollers Operation CS/CJ-series and PLC.
CS1D-CPUH
Manual NSJ-series PLCs. • Programming
CS1D-CPUS
• Master function
CJ1H-CPUH-R
• File memory
CJ1G/H-CPUH
• Other functions
CJ1G-CPUP
Use this manual together with the
CJ1M-CPU Operation Manual (CS-series PLCs:
CJ1G-CPU W339, CJ-series PLCs: W393).
NSJ-(B)-G5D
NSJ-(B)-M3D
CS/CJ/NSJ-series W340 CS1□-CPU-- Learning detailed Instructions are described in detail.
Instructions Refer- CJ1□-CPU-- information on pro- When programming, use this man-
ence Manual gramming instruc- ual together with the Operation Man-
CJ2H-CPU--
tions. ual (CS-series PLCs: W339,
NSJ--
CJ-series PLCs: W393) and the Pro-
gramming Manual (W394).
CS/CJ Series Pro- W341 CQM1H-PRO01 Learning the oper- The operating procedures of the Pro-
gramming Consoles CQM1-PRO01 ating procedures of gramming Consoles are described.
Operation Manual the Programming When programming, use this man-
C200H-PRO27
Consoles. ual together with the Operation Man-
+CS1W-KS001
ual (CS-series PLCs: W339,
CJ-series PLCs: W393), the Pro-
gramming Manual (W394), and the
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340).

26 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

CS/CJ/NSJ Series W342 CS1G/H-CPUH Learning detailed 1) C-mode commands and 2) FINS
Communications CS1G/H-CPU-V1 specifications on commands are described in detail.
Commands Refer- the communica- Refer to this manual for information
CS1D-CPUH
ence Manual tions instructions on communications commands
CS1D-CPUS addressed to (C-mode commands and FINS com-
CS1W-SCU-V1 CS/CJ-series CPU mands) addressed to CPU Units.
CS1W-SCB-V1 Units and
NSJ-series PLCs. Note This manual describes com-
CJ1G/H-CPUH munications commands that
CJ1G-CPUP are addressed to a CPU Unit.
CJ1M-CPU The communications path is
not relevant. (The communi-
CJ1G-CPU
cations commands can be
CJ1W-SCU-V1 sent through the serial com-
munications port of the CPU
Unit, the communications port
of a Serial Communications
Board/Unit, or a communica-
tions port on another Com-
munications Unit.)
CJ-series CJ2 CPU W472 CJ2H-CPU6-EIP Learning the hard- The following information is provided
Unit Hardware User’s CJ2H-CPU6 ware specifica- on a CJ2 CPU Unit.
Manual tions of CJ2 CPU • Introduction and features
CJ2M-CPU
Units.
• Basic system configuration
• Part names and functions
• Installation and setting procedures
• Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the Soft-
ware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W473).
CJ-series CJ2 CPU W473 CJ2H-CPU6-EIP Learning the soft- The following information is provided
Unit Software User’s CJ2H-CPU6 ware specifica- on a CJ2 CPU Unit.
Manual tions of CJ2 CPU • CPU Unit operation
CJ2M-CPU
Units.
• Internal memory
• Programming
• Settings
• Functions built into the CPU Unit
Use this manual together with the
Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W472).
Ethernet Units Oper- W420 CS1W-ETN21 Learning how to Information is provided on the Ether-
ation Manual Con- CJ1W-ETN21 use an Ethernet net Units.
struction of Networks Unit. Information is provided on the basic
setup and FINS communications.
Refer to the Communications Com-
mands Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W342) for details on FINS com-
mands that can be sent to
CS/CJ-series CPU Units when using
the FINS communications service.
Ethernet Units Oper- W421 CS1W-ETN21 Learning how to Information is provided on construct-
ation Manual Con- CJ1W-ETN21 use an Ethernet ing host applications, including func-
struction of Unit. tions for sending/receiving mail,
Applications socket service, automatic clock
adjustment, FTP server functions,
and FINS communications.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 27

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

CS/CJ-series Ether- W465 CJ2H-CPU6-EIP Learning how to Information is provided on the built-in
Net/IP™ Units Oper- CJ2M-CPU3 use the built-in Eth- EtherNet/IP port and EtherNet/IP
ation Manual erNet/IP port of the Units.
CS1W-EIP21
CJ2 CPU Units. Basic settings, tag data links, FINS
CJ1W-EIP21
communications, and other functions
are described.
Sysmac Studio Ver- W504 SYSMAC-SE2 Learning about the The operating procedures of the Sys-
sion 1 Operation operating proce- mac Studio are described.
Manual dures and func-
tions of the
Sysmac Studio.
CX-Programmer W446 CXONE-ALC-V4 Learning about the The operating procedures of the
Operation Manual CXONE-ALD-V4 CX-Programmer CX-Programmer are described.
except for informa-
tion on function
blocks, ST pro-
gramming, and
SFC programming.
NY-Series Industrial W553 NYB-1 Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Box PC User's Man- specifications of NY-series system is provided along
ual the NY-series with the following information on the
Industrial Box PCs, Industrial Box PC.
including introduc- • Features and system configuration
tory information,
• Introduction
designing, installa-
• Part names and functions
tion, and mainte-
nance. • General specifications
• Installation and wiring
• Maintenance and inspection
NY-Series Industrial W555 NYP-1-W Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Panel PC User's C100 specifications of NY-series system is provided along
Manual the NY-series with the following information on the
Industrial Panel Industrial Panel PC.
PCs, including • Features and system configuration
introductory infor-
• Introduction
mation, designing,
• Part names and functions
installation, and
maintenance. • General specifications
• Installation and wiring
• Maintenance and inspection
NY-Series IPC W556 NY512-1 Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Machine Controller specifications of NY-series system is provided along
Industrial Box PC the NY-series with the following information on the
Hardware User's Industrial Box PCs, Industrial Box PC.
Manual including introduc- • Features and system configuration
tory information,
• Introduction
designing, installa-
• Part names and functions
tion, and mainte-
nance. • General specifications

Mainly hardware • Installation and wiring

information is pro- • Maintenance and inspection
vided.

28 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

NY-Series IPC W557 NY532-1 Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Machine Controller specifications of NY-series system is provided along
Industrial Panel PC the NY-series with the following information on the
Hardware User's Industrial Panel Industrial Panel PC.
Manual PCs, including • Features and system configuration
introductory infor-
• Introduction
mation, designing,
• Part names and functions
installation, and
maintenance. • General specifications

Mainly hardware • Installation and wiring

information is pro- • Maintenance and inspection
vided.
NY-Series IPC W558 NY532-1 Learning how to The following information is provided
Machine Controller NY512-1 program and set on the NY-series Controller functions.
Industrial Panel PC / up the Controller • Controller operation
Industrial Box PC functions of an
• Controller features
Software User's Man- NY-series Indus-
• Controller settings
ual trial PC.
• Programming based on IEC
61131-3 language specifications
NY-Series Instruc- W560 NY532-1 Learning detailed The instructions in the instruction set
tions Reference Man- NY512-1 specifications on (IEC 61131-3 specifications) are
ual the basic instruc- described.
tions of an
NY-series Indus-
trial PC.
NY-Series Trouble- W564 NY532-1 Learning about the Concepts on managing errors that
shooting Manual NY512-1 errors that may be may be detected in an NY-series
detected in an Controller and information on individ-
NY-series Indus- ual errors are described.
trial PC.
NX-series NX1P2 W578 NX1P2- Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NX1P
CPU Unit Hardware specifications of system is provided along with the fol-
User's Manual the NX-series lowing information on the NX1P2
NX1P2 CPU Units, CPU Unit.
including introduc- • Features and system configuration
tory information,
• Introduction
designing, installa-
• Part names and functions
tion, and mainte-
nance. • General specifications

Mainly hardware • Installation and wiring

information is pro- • Maintenance and inspection
vided.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 29

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

NX-series NX1P2 W579 NX1P2- Learning about the Of the functions for an NX1P2 CPU
CPU Unit Built-in I/O details of functions Unit, the following information is pro-
and Option Board only for an vided.
User's Manual NX-series NX1P2 • Built-in I/O
CPU Unit and an
• Serial Option Boards
introduction of
• Analog Option Boards
functions for an
NJ/NX-series CPU An introduction of following functions
Unit. for an NJ/NX-series CPU Unit is also
provided.
• Motion control functions
• EtherNet/IP communications func-
tions
• EtherCAT communications func-
tions
NX-series NX102 W593 NX102-  Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NX102
CPU Unit Hardware specifications of system is provided along with the fol-
User's Manual NX102 CPU Units, lowing information on the CPU Unit.
including introduc- • Features and system configuration
tory information,
• Introduction
design, installa-
• Part names and functions
tion, and mainte-
nance. Mainly • General specifications
hardware informa- • Installation and wiring
tion is provided. • Maintenance and inspection
NX-series Z395 NX-SL5 Learning how to Describes the hardware, setup meth-
Safety Control Unit / NX-SI use the NX-series ods, and functions of the NX-series
Communication Con- Safety Control Safety Control Units and Communi-
NX-SO
trol Unit Units and Commu- cations Control Units.
NX-CSG nications Control
User’s Manual
Units.
NX-series Z396 NX-CSG Learning about the Describes the software setup meth-
Communication Con- built-in functions of ods and communications functions of
trol Unit an NX-series Com- an NX-series Communications Con-
munications Con- trol Unit.
Built-in Function
trol Unit.
User’s Manual
NJ-series O037 NJ501-R Using the Describes the settings and operation
Robot Integrated NJ-series Robot of the CPU Unit and programming
CPU Unit Integrated CPU concepts for OMRON robot control.
Unit.
User’s Manual
CS Series Program- W339 CS1G-CPUH Learning the basic The following information is provided
mable Controllers CS1H-CPUH specifications of on a CS-series PLC.
Operation Manual the CS-series • Introduction and features
PLCs, including
• System configuration design
introductory infor-
• Installation and wiring
mation, designing,
installation, and • I/O memory allocation
maintenance. • Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the
Programming Manual (Cat. No.
W394).

30 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

CS Series Duplex W405 CS1D-CPUH(A) Learning the basic The following information is provided
System Operation CS1D-CPUS(A) specifications of on a CS-series Duplex System.
Manual the CS-series • Introduction and features
Duplex System,
• System configuration design
including introduc-
• Installation and wiring
tory information,
designing, installa- • I/O memory allocation
tion, and mainte- • Troubleshooting
nance. Use this manual together with the
Programming Manual (Cat. No.
W394).
CP Series CP1H W450 CP1H-- Learning the basic Provide the following information on
CPU Unit Operation specifications of the CP Series:
Manual the CP1H CPU • Overview, design, installation,
Unit, including maintenance, and other basic
introductory infor- specifications
mation, designing,
• Features
installation, and
• System configuration
maintenance.
CP Series CP1L W462 CP1L-L- Learning the basic • Mounting and wiring
CPU Unit Operation specifications of • I/O memory allocation
CP1L-M-
Manual the CP1L CPU • Troubleshooting
Unit, including Use this manual together with the
introductory infor- CP1H Programmable Controllers
mation, designing, Programming Manual (W451).
installation, and
maintenance.
CP Series W516 CP1L-E- Learning the basic Provides the following information on
CP1L-EL/EM CPU specifications of the CP Series:
Unit Operation Man- theCP1L-EL/EM • Overview, design, installation,
ual CPU Unit, includ- maintenance, and other basic
ing introductory specifications
information,
• Features
designing, installa-
• System configuration
tion, and mainte-
nance. • Mounting and wiring
• I/O memory allocation
• Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the
CP1L Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual (W451).
CP Series CP1H and W451 CP1H-- Learning about the Provides the following information on
CP1L CPU Unit Pro- CP1L-- functions of the CP the CP Series:
gramming Manual Series CP1H CPU • Programming instructions
Units.
• Programming methods
• Tasks
• File memory
• Functions
Use this manual together with the CP
Series CP1H CPU Units Operation
Manual (W450) and CP Series CP1L
CPU Units Operation Manual
(W462).

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 31

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

CP Series CP2E W613 CP2E-- To learn the hard- Describes the following information
CPU Unit Hardware ware specifica- for CP2E PLCs.
User's Manual tions of the CP • Overview and features
Series CP2E CPU
• Basic system configuration
Unit.
• Part names and functions
• Installation and settings
• Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the
CP2E CPU Unit Software User's
Manual (Cat. No. W614) and Instruc-
tions Reference Manual (Cat.
No.W483).
CP Series CP2E W614 CP2E-- To learn the soft- Describes the following information
CPU Unit Software ware specifica- for CP2E PLCs.
User’s Manual tions of the CP • CPU Unit operation
Series CP2E CPU
• Internal memory
Unit.
• Programming
• Settings
• CPU Unit built-in functions
• Interrupts
• High-speed counter inputs
• Pulse outputs
• Serial communications
• Ethernet
• Other functions
Use this manual together with the
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User's
Manual (Cat. No. W613) and Instruc-
tions Reference Manual (Cat.
No.W483).
CP Series W483 CP2E-- To learn program- Describes each programming
CP1E/CP2E CPU ming instructions in instruction indetail. When program-
Unit Instructions Ref- detail. ming, use this manual together with
erence Manual the CP2E CPU Unit Software User's
Manual (Cat. No. W614).
CS/CJ Series Serial W336 CS1W-SCB1-V1 To learn the speci- Describes the use of Serial Commu-
Communications CS1W-SCU1-V1 fications of the nications Unit and Boards to perform
Boards/Units Opera- hardware and serial communications with external
CJ1W-SCU1-V1
tion Manual serial communica- devices, including the use of stan-
CJ1W-SCU2 tion mode of a dard system protocols for OMRON
serial communica- products.
tion board/unit.
Note Refer to the CS/CJ Series
Communications Commands
Reference Manual (W342) for
details on sending commands
in host link mode from a
Serial Communications
Board or Unit’s port.

32 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Models Applications Description

NX-series NX502 W629 NX502-  Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NX502
CPU Unit Hardware specifications of system is provided along with the fol-
User’s Manual NX502 CPU Units, lowing information on the CPU Unit.
including introduc- • Features and system configuration
tory information,
• Introduction
design, installa-
• Part names and functions
tion, and mainte-
nance. • General specifications

Mainly hardware • Installation and wiring

information is pro- • Maintenance and inspection
vided.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 33

 Terminology

Terminology

Term Description
HMI A general term for interface devices that indicates both hardware and software elements. In
this manual, “HMI” refers to an OMRON Sysmac-brand product unless otherwise specified.
PT The hardware elements of the HMI.
NA Series The NA Series of Programmable Terminals and peripheral devices.
NA5 Series NA5-W-V1 and NA5-.
HMI Project A Sysmac Studio project for an HMI.
NA Unit An NA-series Programmable Terminal.
Download Transferring data from the Sysmac Studio to an HMI.
Upload Transferring the project from an HMI to the Sysmac Studio.
IAG collection When you provide IAGs, you provide them as IAG collections. IAGs are also imported as
IAG collections. An IAG collection contains one or more IAGs.

34 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Revision History

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front and back covers of the
manual.

Cat. No. V118-E1-25

Revision code

Revision code Date Revised content

01 June 2014 Original production
02 October 2014 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
03 April 2015 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
04 October 2015 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
05 December 2015 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
06 April 2016 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
07 July 2016 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
08 October 2016 Made revisions accompanying support of NX1/NY series.
09 February 2017 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
10 October 2017 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
11 April 2018 Made revisions accompanying support of NX102 series.
12 July 2018 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
13 October 2018 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
14 January 2019 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
15 April 2019 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
16 April 2020 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade and the addition of units.
17 July 2020 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
18 October 2020 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
19 April 2021 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
20 July 2021 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
21 October 2021 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
22 July 2022 Made revisions accompanying support for secure communication with
the NJ/NX series.
23 October 2022 Revisions for adding safety precautions regarding security.
24 April 2023 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.
25 July 2023 Made revisions accompanying version upgrade.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 35

 Revision History

36 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1

Introduction to the NA-series Pro-

grammable Terminals
This section describes the features, basic system configuration, specifications, and
overall operating procedure of the NA-series Programmable Terminals.

1-1 NA-series Programmable Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-1-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 How HMIs Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-1 HMI Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-2 HMI Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-3 Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-4 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2-5 Memory Specifications for Connected Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-6 Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-2-7 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-8 Functions Shared by the Entire HMI Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2-9 Data That Retained When Power Is Turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3 Operating Procedure for HMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-1 Overall Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-2 Procedure Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1-1

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-1 NA-series Programmable Terminals

The NA-series Programmable Terminals represent the next generation of HMIs for industrial applica-
tions. They display information on FA manufacturing sites and function as control interfaces while pro-
viding safety, reliability, and maintainability. They provide all of the functions of traditional programmable
terminals with a clearer, easy-to-use interface.

OMRON offers the new Sysmac Series of control devices designed with unified communications speci-
fications and user interface specifications.
The NA-series Programmable Terminals are Sysmac devices that you can use together with the
NJ/NX/NY-series Machine Automation Controllers and the Sysmac Studio Automation Software to
achieve optimum functionality and ease of operation.

If you connect an NA-series Programmable Terminal to an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, all you have to
do to specify memory in the Controller is to specify the Controller variables for the objects on the Pro-
grammable Terminal screens. This allows you to create screens without being concerned with the
memory map of the Controller.

Automation Software NA-series PT

Sysmac Studio Specifications with Only
Programming with Variables from Objects on
Variables to Eliminate Screens
Worrying about the
Memory Map

NJ/NX/NY-series Controller

Ethernet

1-1-1 Features

Hardware Features
 High-resolution Display Panels
High-resolution display panels are used to more clearly display large amounts of information than
was possible with previous OMRON products.

 Two Ethernet Ports (Standard Feature)

You can use both Ethernet ports to separate the segment attached to control devices from the seg-
ment attached to maintenance devices. Access is possible from both segments at the same time.
You can connect the following devices.
• NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers
• PLCs
• Computers
• Sysmac Studio

1-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-1 NA-series Programmable

 Standard-feature SD Memory Card Slot
You can use an SD Memory Card inserted in the NA Unit to automatically transfer the project you
created on the Sysmac Studio to the NA Unit, to update the system program in the NA Unit, or to
save the log data from the NA Unit.

Terminals
Software Features
 Specifications with Variables for Superior Reusability 1
If you connect to an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, all you have to do to specify memory in the Control-
ler is to specify the Controller variables. This allows you to create objects that are not dependent on

1-1-1 Features
specific devices or memory maps. This in turn makes the objects much more reusable than they
were with previous PTs.

 Program with Visual Basic

You can use Microsoft’s Visual Basic to program advanced functions that you cannot achieve with
standard objects.

 A Wealth of Security Features

The many security features of the NA-series PTs include operation authority settings and execution
restrictions with IDs.

 Use the Integrated Development Environment of Sysmac Studio Automation

Software
You use the Sysmac Studio to create applications for the NA-series Programmable Terminals.
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environment that covers not only the
NA-series Programmable Terminal, but also the Controller and devices on EtherCAT as well.
You can use consistent procedures for all devices regardless of differences in the devices. The Sys-
mac Studio supports all phases of Controller application, from page creation and sequence design
through debugging, simulations, commissioning, and changes during operation.

 A Wealth of Simulation Features

You can perform simulations using a virtual HMI on the Sysmac Studio. And you can also perform
online debugging with a virtual NJ/NX/NY-series Controller.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1-3

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2 How HMIs Operate

This section describes how the HMI operates.

1-2-1 HMI Software Configuration

An HMI consists of the following software.
• System Program
The system program is required to start the HMI and execute the runtime. For details, refer to
NA-series Programmable Terminal Hardware User’s Manual (V117) or NA-series Programmable Ter-
minal Hardware(-V1) User's Manual (V125).
• Runtime
The runtime is the middleware that executes the project. The runtime is started by the system pro-
gram and it manages execution of the project.
• Project
You use the Sysmac Studio to create your applications. The applications are executed on the run-
time.

1-2-2 HMI Projects

An HMI project contains mainly the following data.

Pages Pages consist of You can specify variables,

objects. and the actions for events.
Project Global variables HMI variables

Global events Events that are shared

by the entire project
Subroutines You can start subroutines
when events occur.
In addition, there is data that is shared by the entire project, such as user alarms, data logging, recipes,
and resources.

1-2-3 Pages
One HMI screen is called a page.
There are the following two types of pages.

Page type Size

Main Maximum screen size for each model

Page
Popup Smaller than the maximum screen
size for each model

You paste objects on the pages.

1-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2 How HMIs Operate

1-2-4 Objects
The objects that you paste on HMI pages consist of the following three elements.

Element

Properties These are static properties.

Example: Names and other general properties, colors, 1
positioning, and other display properties, and
Object assigned condition expressions or variables

1-2-4 Objects
Animations Operating properties for condition expressions
Example: Operating specifications, such as flashing,
enabling/disabling operation, size/coordinate
changes, and displaying/hiding.

Events and You can specify events and the actions to perform when the
Actions events occur.
Example: You can specify subroutines to execute, e.g.,
when a function key is pressed or a value
changes.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1-5

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2-5 Memory Specifications for Connected Devices

Overview
You use HMI global variables to specify memory in a Controller or PLC.
You assign HMI global variables to connected device variables in advance to map them.
1) Variables for connected devices are registered to device variables in the HMI project with one of the
following methods.
a) Variables for connected devices that are registered in the same project are registered automati-
cally.
b) You can copy and paste variables from another project using the clipboard.
c) You can import variables from the external connected device.
2) Devices variables are assigned to HMI global variables.
3) The assigned HMI global variables are specified in the properties of the objects.
4) Then, you transfer the project that you created to the HMI.
Sysmac Studio
project

Sysmac Studio Device registered in the project HMI project

(NJ/NX/NY-series Controller)

HMI settings
Global variables

Global variables 3) Variables

specified in
a) Automatic registration Pages properties

Object
2) Assigned.
1) Device variables

b) Pasted from 4) Transferred.

clipboard.
c) Importing HMI
Different project, i.e.,
in Sysmac Studio Physical NJ/NX/NY-series
Controller or other device
Controller

Global variables P

Refer to 4-1 Registering Variables on page 4-3 for the details on HMI variables.

1-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2 How HMIs Operate

1-2-6 Events
Events are triggers that activate actions.*1
*1. Actions are various operations that can be directly assigned to events.
Events occur when the common page status or object status meets certain conditions.
Events are classified into three groups as shown below.
Group Description 1
Global events Events that occur for shared project status.

1-2-6 Events
Events Page and object events Events that occur for specific page or object status.

User alarm events Events that occur for user alarm status.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1-7

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2-7 Subroutines
You can execute user-created subroutines in the HMI based on the following three types of conditions.
• When global events occur
• When events occur on pages or for objects
• When user alarm events occur

There are two types of subroutines that you can create.

• Global Subroutines
You create these subroutines under the global subroutine item of the HMI project.
• Page Subroutines
You create these subroutines with the page code editor.

You can use Visual Basic to write both the global subroutines and the page subroutines.
Sysmac Studio project

• Global events (i.e., events shared by all pages)

[0]: Event: F1 Key Click Called.

Action: CallSubroutine
Global
subroutine

[1]: Event: Interval Executed.

Events Action: IncreaseVariable
Coded in Visual Basic

• Object event
Called. Object action
Press Page
Action: CallSubroutine subroutine

Page

Object

Called.

• User Alarm Event

[0]: Event: Raised

Action: CallSubroutine

[1]: Event: Acknowledged

Action: IncreaseVariable

• You can call a global subroutine by executing the CallSubroutine action when a global event occurs.

1-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-2 How HMIs Operate

• You can call a global subroutine or page subroutine by executing the CallSubroutine action when an
event occurs on the page or for an object.
• You can call a global subroutine by executing the CallSubroutine action when a user alarm event
occurs.

You can also call a global subroutine from another global subroutine or a page subroutine.

1-2-8 Functions Shared by the Entire HMI Project 1

In addition to global events, the following functions are shared by the entire HMI project.

1-2-8 Functions Shared by the Entire HMI Project

Alarms
Alarms notify the user when certain conditions are met in the HMI.
The following alarms are supported.
• User alarms

Data Logging
You can log data to store the changes in the values of specified variables over time.
You can display the saved data with Trend Graph objects. You can also save this data to external files.

Recipes
A recipe is used to write data (numeric data or text strings) that was set in advance in the project to all
of the specified variables as a group or to read all of the specified variables as a group.
You can manipulate the registered recipe data with Recipe Viewer objects.

Resources
You can manage resources, such as the text strings, movies, still images, and documents that are dis-
played for objects and alarms on pages.

1-2-9 Data That Retained When Power Is Turned OFF

The following data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF.

With No Battery or Low Battery Voltage

• Project data
• Log data that is not written to the SD Memory Card
• User alarm history
• Values of variables with Retain attribute
• Calibration information for touch panel

With Good Battery (in addition to the above)

• Clock information

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1-9

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-3 Operating Procedure for HMIs

This section gives the operating procedure for an HMI and then describes it in more detail.

1-3-1 Overall Procedure

The overall procedure to use an HMI is given below.

STEP1 System Configuration and Project Design

Design the system configurations and project.

STEP 1-1 Designing the System Configurations

STEP 1-2 Designing the Project (Pages, Variables, Subroutines, etc.)

STEP2 Software Settings (Configurations and Setup) and Creating the HMI Application
Create the system configurations that you designed in step 1 on the Sysmac Studio. Also create
the project (pages, variables, subroutines, etc.), build the project, and debug it with simulation
and other functions.

Determining the Connected Device Variables

Setting HMI Variables First and Then Mapping
and Mapping HMI Variables to Them (We rec-
Them to Connected Device Variables
ommend this as the basic procedure.)
STEP 2-1 Starting the Sysmac Studio and Creating STEP 2-1 Starting the Sysmac Studio and Creating
a Project a Project
STEP 2-2 Software Settings (Configurations and STEP 2-2 Creating the HMI Application
Setup)
STEP 2-3 Creating the HMI Application STEP 2-3 Software Settings (Configurations and
Setup)
STEP 2-4 Building the HMI STEP 2-4 Building the HMI
STEP 2-5 Offline Debugging STEP 2-5 Offline Debugging

STEP3 Mounting and Wiring

Mount the HMI.
Connect the connected device and computer (Sysmac Studio) to the HMI.

STEP4 Confirming Operation and Starting Actual System Operation

Download the project from the Sysmac Studio.
Make the settings on the System Menu, check operation on the physical devices, and start
operation.

1 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-3 Operating Procedure for

1-3-2 Procedure Details
STEP1 System Configuration and Project Design
Step Description Reference

HMIs
• Connect an HMI to the external Section 2 Configuration Units in NA Series
device. Programmable Terminal Hardware User’s
STEP 1-1 • Connect an HMI to the Sysmac Manual (V117)
Designing the Studio. Section 2 Configuration Units in NA Series 1
System Configu- Programmable Terminal Hardware(-V1)
rations User’s Manual (V125)

1-3-2 Procedure Details

NA-series Programmable Terminal Device
Connection User’s Manual (V119)
STEP 1-2 Design the project as given below. NA Series Programmable Terminal Software
Designing the User's Manual (V118)
Project (Pages,
Variables, Sub-
routines, Etc.)
• Design the contents to display on
1) Designing the the pages (the pages and objects
Pages and Sub- to use).
routines • Design the execution methods
and contents of the subroutines.
2) Designing • Design the global events.
Items Shared by • Design the alarms, recipes, data
All Pages logging, and other functions.
• HMI external variable design:
Design the mappings between the
connected device variables and
the HMI global variables.
3) Variable Design • Design the HMI internal variables
and subroutine variables.
• Define the attributes of the above
variables, such as the Data Type,
Name, and Retain attributes.

STEP2 Software Settings (Configurations and Setup) and Creating the HMI Application
Sysmac Studio oper-
Step Description Reference
ations
STEP 2-1 1. Start the Sysmac Press the New Project Sysmac Studio Version 1 Opera-
Starting the Sys- Studio and create a Button. tion Manual (W504)
mac Studio and project. Use HMI on the Insert Section 2 Basic Sysmac Studio
Creating a Project 2. Insert the HMI. Menu. Operations

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1 - 11

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

 Determining the Connected Device Variables and Mapping HMI Variables to

Them
We recommend this procedure as the basic procedure.

• Connecting to a Connected Device Registered in the Current Project

STEP 2-2 Make the initial software settings Use Configurations and Section 3 HMI Con-
Software Set- on the Sysmac Studio. Setup in the Multiview figuration and Setup
tings (Configura- Explorer of the Sysmac
tions and Setup) Studio.
• Assign global variables to con- Map the variables under 3-3 Mapping Vari-
• Mapping Vari- nected device variables (map- Configurations and ables on page 3-7
ables ping variables). Setup − Variable Map-
ping.
• Set the parameters related to Make the settings under 3-4 HMI Settings on
the HMI. Configurations and page 3-11
Startup Page, Brightness Set- Setup − HMI Settings.
• HMI Settings
tings, IP Address, FTP Settings,
NTP Settings, FINS Settings,
VNC Settings, etc.
• Set the operation rights to the Make the settings under 3-5 Security Settings
HMI and the language to display Configurations and on page 3-21
• Security Set-
on the HMI. Setup − Security Set- 3-7 Language Set-
tings and Lan-
tings and Configura- tings on page 3-23
guage Settings
tions and Setup −
Language Settings.

• Connecting to a Connected Device Not Registered in the Current Project

STEP 2-2 Make the initial software settings on Use Configurations and Section 3 HMI Con-
Software Set- the Sysmac Studio. Setup in the Multiview figuration and
tings (Configu- Explorer of the Sysmac Setup
rations and Studio.
Setup)
• Register the external connected Add the connected 3-2 Device Refer-
devices. device under Configura- ences on page 3-3
tions and Setup −
Device References.
• You can do either of the following.
a) Importing Variables from the Set up communications
Actual Connected Device: Place and import the variables.
the Sysmac Studio online with
the connected device and import
the variables from the connected
• Device Set- device.
tings b) Importing Variables from Another Copy the variable table
Project: Copy the variable table from another project
in the other project and paste it using the clipboard.
in the variable table for the con-
nected device to import the vari-
ables.
c) Importing Variables from a File: Import variable informa-
Import the information on the tion from a file.
variables of the connected
device from a file, such as an
Excel file.

1 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-3 Operating Procedure for

Assign global variables to connected Map the variables under Section 3 HMI Con-
device variables (mapping variables). Configurations and figuration and
• Mapping
Setup − Variable Map- Setup and 3-3 Map-
Variables
ping. ping Variables on
page 3-7
• Set the parameters related to the Make the settings under 3-4 HMI Settings on

HMIs
HMI. Configurations and page 3-11
Startup Page, Brightness Settings, Setup − HMI Settings.
• HMI Settings
IP Address, FTP Settings, NTP
Settings, FINS Settings, VNC Set-
1
tings, etc.
• Set the operation rights to the HMI Make the settings under 3-5 Security Set-

1-3-2 Procedure Details

• Security Set- and the language to display on the Configurations and tings on page 3-21
tings and HMI. Setup − Security Set- 3-7 Language Set-
Language tings and Configura- tings on page 3-23
Settings tions and Setup −
Language Settings.

STEP 2-3 Create the application (pages, Use HMI in the Multiv- Section 4 Creating the
Creating the HMI variables, subroutines, etc.) with iew Explorer of the HMI Application
Application the Sysmac Studio. Sysmac Studio.
• Register the variables in the HMI Use the editor for HMI 4-1 Registering Vari-
global variable table with the − Data − Global Vari- ables on page 4-3
Sysmac Studio. ables
1) Registering
Note: Variables that were mapped
Variables
in step 2-2 are automatically regis-
tered in the HMI global variables
table.
• Paste the objects on each page Use the editor for HMI 4-3 Creating Pages on
2) Creating Pages and set the object properties − Pages. page 4-22
and other settings. Section 5 Objects
• Create the subroutines. Subroutines shared by 4-5 Subroutines on
You can create the following. the entire project: page 4-55
Select HMI − Global
• Global subroutines
Subroutine.
3) Creating Sub- • Page subroutines Page subroutines: Use
routines
HMI − Pages | Page
Name and select View
Code Editor from the
individual pages.
• Make the settings that are Use HMI − User 4-4 Setting Common
4) Settings
shared by the project: alarms, Alarms, HMI − Reci- Object Functions on
Shared by All
recipes, data logging, global pes, etc. page 4-35
Pages
events, etc.

STEP 2-4 • Convert the HMI project into a Use Build HMI on the 4-11 Building on page
Building the HMI form that the HMI can execute. Project Menu. 4-79

• Check the operation of the Use Start NA Simula- Section 7 Debugging

STEP 2-5
pages on the Simulator (a virtual tion or Run with Con-
Offline Debug-
HMI). troller Simulator on
ging
the Simulation Menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1 - 13

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

 Setting HMI Variables First and Then Mapping Them to Connected Device
Variables

STEP 2-2 Create the application (pages, Use HMI in the Multiview Section 4 Creating the
Creating the HMI variables, subroutines, etc.) Explorer of the Sysmac Stu- HMI Application
Application with the Sysmac Studio. dio.
Register the variables in the HMI − Data − Global Variables 4-1 Registering Vari-
1) Registering
HMI global variable table with Table ables on page 4-3
Variables
the Sysmac Studio.
Paste the objects on each Use the editor for HMI − 4-3 Creating Pages on
2) Creating Pages page and set the object prop- Pages. page 4-22
erties. Section 5 Objects
Create the subroutines. Subroutines shared by the 4-5 Subroutines on
You can create the following. entire project: Select HMI − page 4-55
Global Subroutine − Add.
3) Creating Sub- • Global subroutines
Page subroutines: Use HMI −
routines • Page subroutines Pages and select View Code
Editor from the individual
pages.
Make the settings that are Use HMI − User Alarms, HMI 4-4 Setting Common
4) Settings
shared by the project: alarms, − Recipes, etc. Object Functions on
Shared by All
recipes, data logging, global page 4-35
Pages
events, etc.

• Connecting to a Connected Device Registered in the Current Project

STEP 2-3 Make the initial software settings Use Configurations Section 3 HMI Config-
Software Set- on the Sysmac Studio. and Setup in the Mul- uration and Setup
tings (Configura- tiview Explorer of the
tions and Setup) Sysmac Studio.
• Assign global variables to con- Map the variables 3-3 Mapping Vari-
• Mapping Vari- nected device variables (map- under Configura- ables on page 3-7
ables ping variables). tions and Setup −
Variable Mapping.
• Set the parameters related to Make the settings 3-4 HMI Settings on
the HMI. under Configura- page 3-11
Startup Page, Brightness Set- tions and Setup −
• HMI Settings
tings, IP Address, FTP Settings, HMI Settings.
NTP Settings, FINS Settings,
VNC Settings, etc.
• Set the operation rights to the Make the settings 3-5 Security Settings
HMI and the language to display under Configura- on page 3-21
• Security Set- on the HMI. tions and Setup − 3-7 Language Set-
tings and Lan- Security Settings and tings on page 3-23
guage Settings Configurations and
Setup − Language
Settings.

1 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

1-3 Operating Procedure for

• Connecting to a Connected Device Not Registered in the Current Project

STEP2-3 Make the initial software settings Use Configurations Section 3 HMI Config-
Software Set- on the Sysmac Studio. and Setup in the Mul- uration and Setup
tings (Configura- tiview Explorer of the
tions and Setup) Sysmac Studio.

HMIs
• Register the external connected Add the connected 3-2 Device References
devices. device under Configu- on page 3-3
rations and Setup −
Device References. 1
• You can do either of the follow-
ing.

1-3-2 Procedure Details

a) Importing Variables from the Set up communica- 3-2-2 Connected
Unit Connected Device: tions and import the Devices in the Current
Place the Sysmac Studio variables. Project on page 3-3
online with the connected
device and import the vari-
ables from the connected
device.
• Connected
b) Importing Variables from Copy the variable table
Device Settings
Another Project: Copy the from another project
variable table in the other using the clipboard.
project and paste it in the
device variable table.
c) Importing Variables from a Import variable infor-
File: Import the information mation from a file.
on the variables of the con-
nected device from a file,
such as an Excel file.
• Assign global variables to con- Map the variables 3-3 Mapping Vari-
nected device variables (map- under Configura- ables on page 3-7
ping variables). tions and Setup −
Variable Mapping.
• Set the parameters related to Make the settings 3-4 HMI Settings on
the HMI. under Configura- page 3-11
Startup Page, Brightness Set- tions and Setup −
• HMI Settings
tings, IP Address, FTP Settings, HMI Settings.
NTP Settings, FINS Settings,
VNC Settings, etc.
• Set the operation rights to the Make the settings 3-5 Security Settings
HMI and the language to display under Configura- on page 3-21
• Security Set- on the HMI. tions and Setup − 3-7 Language Set-
tings and Lan- Security Settings and tings on page 3-23
guage Settings Configurations and
Setup − Language
Settings.

STEP 2-4 • Convert the HMI project into a Use Build HMI on the 4-11 Building on page
Building the HMI form that the HMI can execute. Project Menu. 4-79

• Check the operation of the Use Start NA Simula- Section 7 Debugging

STEP2-5
pages on the Simulator (a virtual tion or Run with Con-
Offline Debug-
HMI). troller Simulator on
ging
the Simulation Menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 1 - 15

1 Introduction to the NA-series Programmable Terminals

STEP3 Mounting and Wiring

Step Description Reference
• Mount the HMI to the panel. 3-3 Installing NA Units in NA Series Pro-
• Wire Power Supply. grammable Terminal Hardware User's Man-
ual (V117)
1) Mounting
3-3 Installing NA Units in NA Series Pro-
grammable Terminal Hardware(-V1) User's
Manual (V125)
• Wire the Ethernet cables. 3-4 Wiring Methods in NA Series Program-
mable Terminal Hardware User's Manual
2) Wiring the (V117)
Ethernet Cable to 3-4 Wiring Methods in NA Series Program-
the Connected mable Terminal Hardware(-V1) User's Man-
Device ual (V125)
NA-series Programmable Terminal Device
Connection User’s Manual (V119)
• Wire the USB cable. 2-4 Support Software in NA Series Program-
or mable Terminal Hardware User's Manual
3) Connecting the (V117)
Computer (Sys- • Wire the Ethernet cable.
mac Studio) 2-4 Support Software in NA Series Program-
mable Terminal Hardware(-V1) User's Man-
ual (V125)

STEP4 Confirming Operation and Starting Actual System Operation

Sysmac Studio
Step Description Reference
operations
• Turn ON the power supply to the Use Communica- Section 6 Connecting
HMI and place the Sysmac Stu- tions Setup on the to the HMI and Section
1) Online Connec-
dio online. Then, download the HMI Menu. 8 Synchronizing Proj-
tion to Sysmac
project.*1 Use Synchroniza- ects
Studio and Proj-
ect Download *1.Use the Synchronize operation tion on the HMI
of the Sysmac Studio to Menu.
download the project.

• Integrate the NA Unit into the --- Section 7 Debugging

actual system, manipulate the
project that you created and
confirm the following: that cor-
2) Operation
rect values are written to the
Check on NA Unit
connected device, that the
pages change correctly, and that
values set at the connected
device are updated.

3) Actual System • Start actual operation. --- ---

Operation

1 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2
Basic Sysmac Studio Operations
This section describes basic operations on the Sysmac Studio.

2-1 Parts of the Sysmac Studio Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-1-1 Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Menu Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3 Basic Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-4 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-4-1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-4-2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-4-3 Library Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-4-4 Operations for Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-4-5 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-4-6 Security Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-4-7 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-4-8 Project Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-5-1 Creating a Project File from the Start Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-5-2 Adding an HMI to an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-5-3 Changing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-5-4 Importing and Exporting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2-1

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-1 Parts of the Sysmac Studio Window

This section gives the names and functions of the parts of the Sysmac Studio Window.
This manual describes only functions that apply when an HMI is selected for the device. For information
on Sysmac Studio functions not described in this manual, refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Opera-
tion Manual (Cat. No. W504).

Precautions for Correct Use

When you use the Sysmac Studio, use the standard Windows desktop theme. If you do not use
the standard Windows desktop theme, part of the display may not be correct.

2-1-1 Application Window

Tab

Menu bar Toolbar

Configurations
and Setup Header

HMI Header
(b) (c)
(a)

Number Name
(a) Multiview Explorer
(b) Edit Pane
(c) Toolbox
The functions of these parts are described starting on the next page.

2-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-1 Parts of the Sysmac Studio Window

Multiview Explorer (a)

• This pane is your access point for all Sysmac Studio data.
When an HMI is selected, it is divided into a Configurations
and Setup Layer and an HMI Layer.
• You can also display the Page Explorer to display lists of
objects on pages or the Code Explorer to display lists of
subroutines.

2-1-1 Application Window

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2-3

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

 Layers and Items in the Multiview Explorer

Configurations and Setup HMI

Device References Pages
Variable Mapping Page
HMI Settings User Alarms
Security Settings Group
Troubleshooter Controller Events
Language Settings User Events
Operation Log Settings Data Logging
DataSet
Data Groups
DataGroup
Recipes
Recipe
Custom Keypads
Group
Data
Data Types
Global Variables
Global Events
Global Subroutines
SubroutineGroup
Resources
Root
Imported IAGs
IAG
Scale Transformations

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot download the data to the HMI if an error icon is displayed.

 Page Explorer

The Page Explorer displays a list of objects on a page. If you click an object in the
Page Explorer, the object will be selected on the Edit Pane.
To change the attributes for grouped objects or for individual objects in IAGs, select
the individual objects on the Page Explorer.
The page index and number of objects in the page are displayed at the topmost part
of the tree in the following format.
Name of page (page index) [number of objects]

 Code Explorer

The Code Explorer displays the subroutines in the project. You can double-click a
subroutine to edit it. You can also search for the place where a subroutine is used by
right-clicking a subroutine name and selecting Search from the menu.

2-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-1 Parts of the Sysmac Studio Window

Edit Pane (b)
The basic Sysmac Studio operations on the Edit Pane generally apply to HMIs. If an HMI is selected,
you can edit pages and set up the HMI.

Toolbox (c)

• The Toolbox shows the objects that you can use to edit the page that is displayed in
the Edit Pane.
You can also display the Properties Window, Animations Window and the Events and
Actions Window to make the settings of the objects.
2

2-1-1 Application Window

Properties Window (c)

• The Properties Window allows you to set the static operations for the selected objects
and pages. For items that have a number of properties that fluctuate according to set-
tings such as a text, a setting dialog box is displayed by clicking .
The Properties Window offers two modes.
The Standard mode displays only the most commonly used properties.
The Detail mode displays all the properties.
In the assignment mode, only variables and resource assignments are displayed.

Animations Window (c)

• The Animations Window allows you to set the conditions for dynamically changing the
selected objects.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2-5

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

Events and Actions Window (c)

• The Events and Actions Window allows you to set the actions linked to events gener-
ated by the selected objects and pages.

2-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-2 Menu Command Structure

2-2 Menu Command Structure

The menu commands that are displayed when an HMI is selected as the device are listed below.

Menu Submenu/command
File Close
Save
Save As
Save As New Number
Import
― 2
Export
Page Settings
Print
Image File Output
Exit
Edit Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Select All
Search and Replace ―
Find Previous
Find Next
Replace Font
IAG Replace
Device Replace
Jump to Multiview Explorer
Search unused variables
View Multiview Explorer
Project Shortcut View
Toolbox
3D Visualizer
Output Tab Page
Watch Tab Page
Cross Reference Tab Page
―
Build Tab Page
Search and Replace Results Tab Page
Page Explorer
Code Explorer
Properties
Animations
Events and Actions
Smart Project Search ―
Recently Closed Windows ―
Clear Recently Closed Windows History ―
Zoom Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom to Fit
Zoom Reset
Manage Window Layout Templates ―
Reset Window Layout ―

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2-7

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

Menu Submenu/command
Insert Controller NJ101
NJ301
NJ501
NX1P2
NX102
NX502
NX701
NY512
NY532
Application Manager
Safety Network Controller NX
Drive
HMI NA5
NA
Measurement Sensor ZW
Vision Sensor FH
FHV
FQ-M
Slave Terminal EtherNet/IP Coupler
PROFINET Coupler
External Device
Page
Page Group
User Alarm Group ―
Data Set
Recipe
Global Subroutine Group
Project Build HMI
IncrementalBuild HMI
Abort Build
―
Resource Usage
Reset Default Value
IAG Collections Manager
HMI Communications Setup
Change Device
―
Online
Offline
Synchronization NA Device
Media Device
Transfer Transfer From Device
Transfer To Device
HMI Clock
―
Update HMI Name
Security HMI Write Protection
HMI Source Code Protec-
tion
Clear All Memory
―
Reset HMI Device

2-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

Menu Submenu/command

2-2 Menu Command Structure

Simulation Start NA Simulation
Stop NA Simulation
Step Execution
Step In
Step Out
Continue ―
Jump to Current Position
Set/Clear Breakpoint
Enable/Disable Breakpoint
Clear All Breakpoints
Run with Controller Simulator
2
Tools Import Object Properties
Export Object Properties
―
Set Shortcut Key
Option
Window Close
Float
Dock
New Horizontal Tab Group
New Vertical Tab Group
Move to Next Tab Group
Move to Previous Tab Group ―
Close All But This
Close All Except Active Device
Close All
Close Tab
Open Next Tab
Open Previous Tab
Help Help Contents
Instruction Reference
Keyboard Mapping Reference
―
Manual Download
Online Registration
About Sysmac Studio

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2-9

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-3 Basic Editing Operations

This section describes differences in basic Sysmac Studio operation when an HMI is selected as the
device.

Entry Assistance
There are some differences in the standard operation of the Sysmac Studio when an HMI is selected as
the device. This section describes those differences.

 Entering Variable Names and Data Types

• Entering variable names, e.g., when setting properties
• Entering data types in variable tables
Example: When you enter a variable name as a property, the variable names that you can enter are
displayed in a list.

2 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

 Entering Text in the Code Editor

2-3 Basic Editing Operations

• When you enter text in the Code Editor, the cursor moves to the first item in the list that starts with
the character that you entered.

• When you press the Tab Key after entering the first part of the keyword (“in” in this example), the 2
rest of the keyword is automatically entered.

 Entering Text and Resource ID

• Entering text and resource ID when setting properties
Example: When you enter text as a property, the texts that you can enter are displayed in a list.
Texts and resource IDs are displayed at intervals.

Additional Information

For text which has multiple lines, line feed codes are replaced with spaces in the resource ID
list.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 11

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-4 Sysmac Studio Settings and Opera-

tions
This section lists the operations of the Sysmac Studio that can be used only when an HMI is selected.

2-4-1 Setting Parameters

Item Description Reference

HMI Settings You can make settings for an HMI. Section 3 HMI Configuration
and Setup
Device References If you connect an HMI to a device (e.g., Control- 3-2 Device References on
ler or PLC) that is not registered in the current page 3-3
HMI project, the connected external device will
be added.
Internal Device Controllers registered in the project are dis-
played.
External Device You can set up communications and import vari-
ables for connected devices that have been
added.
Variable Mapping You can associate variables in the connected 3-3 Mapping Variables on
devices with variables in the HMI. page 3-7

2-4-2 Programming

Item Description Reference

Toolbox The Toolbox displays a list of the objects that Section 5 Objects
you can use.
You can search for the required objects and
drag them to the Page Editor to position the
objects.
Properties You can set the static attributes of the pages
and objects.
Animations You can set the operations for object condition
expressions.
Events and Actions You can set the actions to perform when events
occur.
Page Explorer The Page Explorer displays a list of objects on a
page. You can select objects or change the
order of the display.
Code Explorer The Code Explorer displays lists of subroutines
in the project. You can double-click a subroutine
to edit it.
Page Editor You can position objects and create pages. You 4-3 Creating Pages on page
can also use the Page Editor to make settings 4-22
for objects.
Code Editor You can use Visual Basic to create subroutines. 4-5 Subroutines on page 4-55

2 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-4 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Reference
Search and Replace You can search and replace strings in project 4-6 Search and Replace on
data. page 4-62
Replace Font Replaces all specified fonts with other fonts. 4-7 Font Replacement on
page 4-63
IAG Replace Replaces all specified IAGs with other IAGs. 4-8 IAG Replacement on
page 4-72
Device Replace Replaces devices assigned with a variable, etc. 4-9 Device Replacement on
page 4-75
Cross Reference Searches the area where the search target is 4-10 Cross References on
allocated, and displays a list. page 4-78
Build Build HMI Convert the project into a form that the HMI can 4-11 Building on page 4-79
execute.
2
IncrementalBuild Builds only parts that were changed since the
HMI last build.

2-4-3 Library Functions

Abort Build You can abort a build operation.
Resource Usage You can display the resource usage.

2-4-3 Library Functions

Item Description Reference

Toolbox You can register objects that you have created Section 9 Reusing Objects
and then reuse them.
IAG You can output an IAG that you created in an
IAG project as an IAG collection, to use it in
another project.

2-4-4 Operations for Debugging

Item Description Reference

Monitoring You can monitor variables during project execu- Section 7 Debugging
tion.
You can monitor the present values of HMI
global variables. You use the Watch Tab Page
for monitoring.
Changing the Present Values You can change the present values of global Section 7 Debugging
of Variables variables and system-defined variables.
You can do this on a Watch Tab Page.
Controlling Execution with You can control simulation execution to monitor Section 7 Debugging
Breakpoints and Step Execu- the program or to check operation.
tion Step execution and pausing are also possible.

2-4-5 Communications

Item Description Reference

Going Online with an HMI You can place the computer online with an HMI Section 6 Connecting to the
to synchronize the project. HMI

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 13

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-4-6 Security Measures

Item Description Reference

Prevention of Confirming HMI If the device name or the serial ID is different 3-5 Security Settings
Incorrect Con- device Names and between the project and the HMI when an on page 3-21
nections Serial IDs online connection is established, a confirmation
dialog box is displayed.
Preventing Incor- Operation Author- You can use operation authorities to restrict the
rect Operation ity Verification ability to perform operations or display data.
Prevention of the Password Protec- You can set password protection for project files
Theft of Assets tion for Project to protect your assets.
Files
Recording oper- Operation Log You can record logs when operations specified
ations on the NA unit are executed.

2-4-7 Online Help

Item Description Reference

Sysmac Studio Help System You can access Sysmac Studio operating pro-
cedures.
Keyboard Mapping Reference You can display a list of convenient shortcut
keys that you can use on the Sysmac Studio.

2-4-8 Project Management Functions

Item Description Reference

Image File Output You can output a page as an image file. You can 11-3 Image File Output on
set any page to be output. page 11-6
Import/Export User Alarm You can import or export user alarms. 11-4 Import/Export User
Alarm on page 11-7
Import/Export Resources You can import or export resource general 11-5 Import/Export Resources
strings and alarm strings. on page 11-13
Import/Export Object Proper- You can import or export object text and vari- 11-6 Import/Export Object
ties ables on pages, and expressions. Properties on page 11-20
Import/Export Pages You can import or export pages and 11-7 Importing/Exporting
page-related settings. Pages on page 11-24

2 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects

2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects
This section describes how to create and save projects and perform other basic operations to use
HMIs.

2-5-1 Creating a Project File from the Start Page

Use the following procedure to create a project file from the Start Page.

1 Click the New Project Button in the Start Page. 2

2-5-1 Creating a Project File from the Start Page

Start Page

The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed. The following table gives the functions of the
buttons.

Menu command Description

New Project Button Creates a project file.
Open Project Button Opens an existing project file.

2 Enter the project name, author, and comment in the Project Properties Dialog Box, select HMI
from the device category, and then click the Create Button. (Only the project name is required.)

You can change the properties later. Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual
(Cat. No. W504).

A project file is created and the following window is displayed.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 15

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

A project file is created with the specified device already inserted.

2-5-2 Adding an HMI to an Existing Project

Right-click the Controller Icon and select Add Device from the menu.

Or, select the device directly from the Insert Menu.

Example: HMI - NA5: The Add Device Dialog Box is displayed.

Select the device and then click the OK Button. The device is added to the project.

To change the target device, select a device from the list.

2 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects

2-5-3 Changing Devices
Right-click the HMI Icon and select Change Device from the menu. Or, select Change Device from the
HMI Menu.

The Change Device Dialog Box is displayed.

2

2-5-3 Changing Devices

Select the device and then click the OK Button. The device is changed.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you change the device, the settings for functions that are not supported by the new model
will be lost.
• If you change to a model that has a different display size, the objects will be enlarged or
reduced according to the new display size. However, elements other than objects, such as
font sizes, will not change.

HMI Versions
Set the version when you create a new HMI project or when you add an HMI to an existing project.
You can set the version to the runtime version of the HMI that you are using. You can program and
make settings within the ranges that are supported for the runtime version. If you attempt to use func-
tions that are not supported by the runtime version that you set, you will not be able to use them or
errors will occur.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 17

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

Additional Information

When you open the project that was created in past versions of the Sysmac Studio version 1.11
or higher, it will be converted as follows.

Runtime Sysmac Studio

version
before V1.18 V1.24 V1.27 V1.32 V1.43 V1.45 V1.50 V1.54
V1.11,
conver- V1.10 V1.12 V1.13 V1.14 V1.15 V1.16 V1.17 to V1.23 to to V1.31 to to to to or
sion V1.22 V1.26 V1.30 V1.42 V1.44 V1.49 V1.53 later

1.00 1.00 1.01*1 1.02*1 1.03*1 1.03*1*2 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1
1.01 ― 1.01 1.02*1 1.03*1 1.03*1*2 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1
1.02 ― ― 1.02 1.03*1 1.03*1*2 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1
1.03 ― ― ― 1.03 1.03*2 1.03 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1 1.03*1
1.04 ― ― ― ― ―*2 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04
1.05 ― ― ― ― ― 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.06 ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
1.07 ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07
1.08 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08
1.09 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.09
1.10 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
1.11 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11
1.12 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12
1.13 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.13
1.14 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14
1.15 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.15 1.15 1.15
1.16 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.16 1.16
1.17 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― 1.17
*1. The runtime version will be converted.
*2. The runtime version will be converted to 1.04 if the HMI Extended Option is enabled.

2 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects

2-5-4 Importing and Exporting Devices
Right-click the HMI Icon and select Import or Export from the menu.

Additional Information

You cannot execute exporting devices if an error exists in the project.

Importing Devices
Use the following procedure to import a device.
2

1 Right-click the HMI Icon and select Import from the menu.

2-5-4 Importing and Exporting Devices

2 Click Browse.

3 Select the file and click Open.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 19

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

4 Set the options as required and click Execute.

2 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2-5 Basic Operations for HMI Projects

Exporting Devices
Use the following procedure to export a device.

1 Right-click the HMI Icon and select Export from the menu.

2 Click Browse.

2-5-4 Importing and Exporting Devices

3 Select the file and click Save.

4 Click Execute.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 2 - 21

2 Basic Sysmac Studio Operations

2 - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

HMI Configuration and Setup
3
This section describes how to configure and set up HMIs on the Sysmac Studio, includ-
ing mapping variables with connected devices and HMI settings.

3-1 Outline of Configurations and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-1-1 Connected Device Registration and Variable Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Device References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2-1 Types of Connected Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2-2 Connected Devices in the Current Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2-3 Registering External Connected Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 Mapping Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-1 Mapping Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-2 Opening the Variable Mapping Tab Page and Tab Page Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-3 Variable Mapping Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-3-4 When a Variable Mapping Error Cannot be Resolved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-4 HMI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-4-1 HMI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3-4-2 Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-4-3 TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4-4 FTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-4-5 NTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4-6 FINS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-4-7 VNC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4-8 Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-4-9 Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-5 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-6 Troubleshooter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-7 Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-8 Operation Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-9 HMI Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-10 Updating the HMI Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-11 Write Protecting the HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-12 Clear All Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-13 Resetting the HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3-1

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-1 Outline of Configurations and Setup

This section describes how to set up HMIs and connected devices, such as Controllers and PLCs. The
following items are provided in the HMI Configurations and Setup.

Item Description
Device References You can set up connected devices and import variables.
Variable Mapping You can assign HMI variables to the variables in the connected devices.
HMI Settings These are the parameters related to the HMI.
Security Settings You can set up restrictions to operations on HMIs.
Troubleshooter You can set parameters for the Troubleshooter.
Language Settings You can make settings for multi-language projects.
Operation Log Settings These are used for an Operation Log.

3-1-1 Connected Device Registration and Variable Mapping

Device references must be set only to connect to external devices that are not registered in the current
project. They are not necessary to connect to a Controller that is registered in the current project.

The following figure shows the relationship between connected device references and variable map-
ping.
The HMI global variables are mapped to the connected device variables.
To access variables in the connected devices from an HMI, you must map the variables.
Sysmac Studio Project

Pages

Page 1
Page 0
Object Properties
Object
Behaviour
Expression Controller0_aaa

(E) Selectable
HMI Global Variable Table ■ Variable Map ■ Connected Device References

Variable name Data type (C)Mapping Global variables of connected devices

External device
Boolean Variable name Data type
Position Port Data type Variable name
Integer aaa Boolean
Controller0 aaa Boolean
bbb Integer Variables copied through the clipboard from other
bbb Integer
projects or variables imported by accessing the
physical device (PLC or Controller)
(D) Automatic registration
Importing connected
Selectable device variables
(B) Automatic registration Variables automatically imported from Controllers in the project
Internal
device

(A) Connected device variables are a) automatically imported from the same project or b) copied from
another project or manually imported from an external device or a file, such as an Excel file.
(B) The connected device variables are automatically registered in the variable mappings.
(C) The HMI global variables are mapped to the connected device variables.
(D) The mapped HMI global variables are automatically registered in the global variable table of the HMI.
(E) You specify HMI global variables in the object properties.

3-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-2 Device References

This section describes how to set up HMIs and connected devices, such as Controllers and PLCs.

3-2 Device References

3-2-1 Types of Connected Devices
Different operations are used to connect to Controllers that are registered and Controllers that are not
registered in the current project.
• Controllers that are already registered in the current project are automatically registered in the HMI
project as internal connected devices.
• To connect to a device that is not registered in the current HMI project, you must register the device
as an external connected device.
3
Additional Information

3-2-1 Types of Connected Devices

If you upload a project that includes Controllers registered as internal connected devices to a
project in which the Controllers are not registered, the devices are registered as internal con-
nected devices that do not have links to Controllers. Refer to 8-1 Synchronizing Projects on
page 8-2 for details.

3-2-2 Connected Devices in the Current Project

Controllers that are registered in the current project are displayed as connected devices. Use the fol-
lowing procedure to display the device settings if you need to check them.

1 Click Device References under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 The Controllers that are registered in the current project are displayed under Internal Device.

3 Double-click the project to display the following Device Configuration Tab Page.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3-3

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-2-3 Registering External Connected Devices

To connect the HMI to a device that is not registered in the current HMI project, you must register the
device as an external connected device. The procedures to register and set up external connected
devices are given below.

Registering and Setting Up External Connected Devices

This section describes how to register and set up external connected devices.

1 Right-click Device References under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Select Add - ExternalDevice. The device is added as ExternalDevice, where  is a serial

number starting from 0.

3 Double-click the new ExternalDevice.

3-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

4 Select the vendor of the required device in the Device Vendor Box under Device Configura-
tion. The device series of the selected vendor is displayed. Make the selections for the required
device. The device communications drivers of the vendor selected for the device series are dis-
played. Select the communications driver for the required device.

3-2 Device References

3

5 Make the required settings in the Communications Configuration Area. Refer to the NA-series

3-2-3 Registering External Connected Devices

Programmable Terminal Device Connection User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119) for details.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3-5

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

Importing External Connected Device Variables

To connect the HMI to a device that is not registered in the current HMI project, you must import the
variables from the external connected device.
There are three ways to import external connected device variables.
• Importing device variables online from the actual external connected device
• Copying variables from the variable table in another project
• Importing variables from an Excel or CXT file

 Importing Device Variables Online from the Actual External Connected

Device
Click the Import Variables Button. The variables are imported from the external connected device.
Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119)
for details.

 Copying Variables from the Variable Table in Another Project

You can use the clipboard to copy the required variables from the Support Software for the con-
nected device and paste them in the device variables table for the external connected device. How-
ever, you cannot copy connected device variables if they are structure variables.
Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119)
for details.

 Importing Variables from an Excel or CXT File

Click the Import from File Button. The variables are imported for the external connected device.
Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection User's Manual (Cat. No. V119)
for details.

Updating Device Variables

If you change the variables on a device, update the device variables in the HMI project as required.
There are three ways to update device variables.
• Updating device variables online from the actual external connected device
• Copying variables from the variable table in another project
• Importing variables from an Excel or CXT file

 Updating Device Variables Online from the Actual External Connected Device
Click the Update Variables Button. The differences between the variables on the external con-
nected device and the device variables in the HMI project are displayed. Select the variables to
update.

 Copying Variables from the Variable Table in Another Project

You can use the clipboard to copy the required variables from the Support Software for the con-
nected device and paste them in the device variables table for the external connected device.

 Importing Variables from an Excel or CXT File

Click the Import from File Button. The differences between the variables in the Excel file and the
device variables in the HMI project are displayed. Select the variables to be updated.

3-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-3 Mapping Variables

This section describes the settings required to access variables in connected devices through HMI
global variables.

3-3 Mapping Variables

3-3-1 Mapping Variables
Mapping variables refers to assigning variables in devices connected to the HMI (called device vari-
ables) to global variables in the HMI. Device variables are used on the HMI by assigning them to HMI
global variables.
Therefore, mapping variables is required. Not accessing device variables directly allows you to reuse
projects simply by changing the variable mappings.
3
Global variables that are assigned to device variables are called external variables.

3-3-1 Mapping Variables

3-3-2 Opening the Variable Mapping Tab Page and Tab Page Parts

Additional Information

You can also use a setting to map variables automatically. For details, refer to 11-1 Sysmac
Studio Option Settings on page 11-2.

1 Double-click Variable Mapping under Configurations and Setup.

The Variable Mapping Tab Page is displayed.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3-7

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

Parts of the Window

No Item Description
1 Position Displays the IP addresses of the connected devices.
2 Port Displays the connected devices and device variables in a tree structure.
3 Data Type The data types of the device variables are displayed.
4 Variable You can set the name of a HMI global variable. You can use entry assistance to
select from a list of previously registered HMI global variables.
5 Variable Comment You can set comments for the HMI global variables. These comments are also
applied to the global variable table. If comments are set for the device variable,
Comment*1 for the device variable is automatically applied.
*1. If there are multiple comments registered in internal variables, Comment 1 will be applied.

3-3-3 Variable Mapping Methods

To map variables, you can either create new global variables and assign them or you can assign previ-
ously created global variables.
To increase the reusability of the project, create the global variables first and then assign them.
However, if a device variable is a structure, you must create a new external variable during variable
mapping.

Creating New External Variables

You can create a new global variable and assign it to a device variable.

When you create an external variable, you can either have the name generated automatically or you
can create it manually.

 Automatically Creating New Variable Names

Use the following procedure.

1 Select one or more device variables in the variable mappings, right-click, and select Create
Device Variable from the popup menu.

Automatically generated variable names are registered in the global variable table according to
the following rule.
Automatic generation rule: The device variable name is added after the controller name and
separated with an underline.

3-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

 Manually Entering New Variable Names

Select the device variable and directly enter the variable name in the Variable column.

Selecting Previously Registered Global Variables and Mapping

Them

3-3 Mapping Variables

You can select global variables that are already registered in the global variable table and assign them
to device variables.
For example, this method can be used to map external variables in the following cases.
• Setting an HMI global variable first and then assigning it to a device variable
• Creating a common project first and specifying connected devices later

Use the following procedure.

3
1 Register the global variables in the global variable table in advance.

3-3-4 When a Variable Mapping Error Cannot be Resolved

When you map variables, you can select global variables from lists of variables that are already
registered in the global variable table and assign them to device variables.

Additional Information

When the variables are mapped, the device variable comments are automatically set as global
variable comments.

3-3-4 When a Variable Mapping Error Cannot be Resolved

Follow the procedure below if a variable mapping error cannot be resolved.

1 If an unlinked internal device exists, relink it.

Refer to 8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices on page 8-18 for information on how to relink internal
devices.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3-9

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

2 Right-click Variable Mapping under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer, and
select Force Re-mapping in the menu that appears.

3 Click Yes.

Additional Information

When forced remapping is executed, if the variables were deleted on the controller side, the
mapping is canceled and internal variables are used. As the controller user-defined data type
cannot be used for internal variables, a build error occurs if the build is executed in this state.
Make appropriate corrections such as re-registering the variables on the controller side.
Similarly, if the data type is changed on the controller side, an error may occur in the object
properties. Make appropriate corrections such as changing the variable assignments.

3 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4 HMI Settings

This section describes the HMI settings.

3-4-1 HMI Settings

3-4 HMI Settings

You can make settings for an HMI.
The following table lists the setting items.

Item Icon Description When setting is required

Device Settings There are page, screen saver, These settings are always required.
brightness settings, and other set-
tings. 3
TCP/IP Settings These are the Ethernet settings for These settings are always required.
Ethernet ports 1 and 2.

3-4-1 HMI Settings

FTP Settings These are the FTP server settings. These settings are required to use
the FTP server.

NTP Settings These are the NTP client settings. These settings are required when
you use an NTP client.

FINS Settings These are the settings for FINS com- These settings are required when
munications. using FINS communications with a
CS/CJ/CP-series PLC.
VNC Settings These are the VNC settings. These settings are required to use
VNC.

Print Settings These are the settings for printing These settings are required to print
and capturing screens on the HMI. or capture screens.

Serial port These are serial port settings. When using a serial port to connect
Settings with the CS/CJ/CP series.

Setting Procedure for HMI Settings

1 Double-click HMI Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. The
HMI Settings Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Click the icons on the left to display the corresponding dialog boxes.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 11

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-2 Device Settings

These are the device settings.

Item Description
Startup Page
Page name Sets the page to display first when the HMI is started.
Startup Language
Startup language Sets the project language to use when the HMI is started.
Software Keypads/USB Keyboard
System Keypad Size Sets the display size of the system keypad.
USB Keyboard layout Sets the layout of the USB keyboard.
Security
Automatically log out user after Select this check box to automatically log out the user after a specified
period of inactivity. period of inactivity.
Inactivity period Specify the time of inactivity before the user is logged out automatically.

3 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

Item Description
System Menu
Double-tap Interval Sets the interval to use to detect double taps.
Detectable corner Select the corners in which to detect the operation to display the System
Menu.
Screen Saver
Screen saver type Sets the type of screen saver.
Activate after Sets the time after the screen is touched before the screen saver is
started.

3-4 HMI Settings

Screen Brightness
Screen brightness Sets the brightness of the screen.
Sound
Touch Input Notification Sets whether to beep when an input is accepted.
Alarm Notification Sets the buzzer that is beeped when an alarm occurs, specifically, the
type of buzzer and the user alarm level.
Internal Retained Memory Settings 3
Maximum Number of User Alarm Sets the maximum number of alarm logs to save in the NA.
Logs

3-4-2 Device Settings

Global Variables
The maximum number of Sets the maximum number of characters allocated for a String Retain
STRING-type characters (default) variable when the maximum number of characters is not set.
Safety Monitor
Enable Enables the Safety Monitor function.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 13

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-3 TCP/IP Settings

These are the settings for TCP/IP.

The following settings are provided for Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2.

Item Description
Ethernet Port 1 - Settings
IP Address Sets the local IP address.
Subnet mask Sets the subnet mask.
Default gateway Sets the IP address of the default gateway. This setting is not required when
a default gateway is not used.
Primary DNS server Sets the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS server Sets the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Primary WINS server Sets the IP address of the primary WINS server.
Secondary WINS server Sets the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Ethernet Port 2 - Settings
Direct connection with Sys- Select this check box to connect Ethernet port 2 directly to the Sysmac Stu-
mac Studio dio without going through an Ethernet switch. If you select this check box,
the IP addresses and other settings for Ethernet port 2 are ignored.
IP Address Sets the local IP address.
Subnet mask Sets the subnet mask.
Default gateway Sets the IP address of the default gateway. This setting is not required when
a default gateway is not used.
Primary DNS server Sets the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS server Sets the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Primary WINS server Sets the IP address of the primary WINS server.
Secondary WINS server Sets the IP address of the secondary WINS server.

3 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-4 FTP Settings

These are the FTP server settings.

3-4 HMI Settings

3

3-4-4 FTP Settings

Item Description
FTP Settings
FTP server Specifies whether to use the FTP server of the HMI.
Login name Sets the login name to externally connect to Ethernet port 1 or 2 on the HMI
via FTP. You can use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
Password Sets the password to use to externally connect to Ethernet port 1 or 2 via FTP.
You can use 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 15

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-5 NTP Settings

These are the settings for an NTP (Network Time Protocol) client.
The HMI gets the clock information from the specified NTP server at the specified interval and updates
the built-in clock information.

Item Description
NTP Settings
Synchronize with an Internet Select this check box to synchronize the built-in clock in the HMI with the
time server clock information from the NTP server.
NTP server Sets the IP address of the NTP server.
Interval Sets the interval at which to get the clock information from the NTP server. *1
*1. Communication with the server is based on these settings. However, if the displacement between the time ob-
tained from the server and the HMI built-in clock exceeds 24 hours, the built-in clock will not be corrected.

3 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-6 FINS Settings

These are the settings for FINS communications.
These settings are required when FINS communications are used between the HMI and a
CS/CJ/CP-series PLC.

3-4 HMI Settings

3

3-4-6 FINS Settings

Item Description
FINS Address
Ethernet port #1 Sets the FINS network address of Ethernet port 1.
The FINS node address is automatically created from the IP address.
Ethernet port #2 Sets the FINS network address of Ethernet port 2.
The FINS node address is automatically created from the IP address.
FINS/UDP
FINS/UDP port no Displays the port number used for FINS/UDP.
Remote Network Table Sets the routing table.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 17

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-7 VNC Settings

These are the settings for VNC (Virtual Network Computing).
VNC implements a remote desktop to allow remote control of a computer located on a network.
You must enable the server functionality on the HMI to control. You can start the client software on the
computer from which to perform remote control, connect to the HMI, and then control it remotely.

Item Description
VNC Settings
VNC Server Specifies whether to use VNC.
Port No. Sets the port number.
Mode Sets the operations to enable from the VNC client.
Password Sets the password.
Enable VNC multiple login Specifies whether to allow multiple clients to log in.
Enable registered client login Specifies whether to allow only certain clients to log in.
IP Address Registers the IP addresses of the client devices to be allowed
to log in.
MAC Address Registers the MAC addresses of the client devices to be allowed to log in.
(e.g., 3D:F2:C9:A6:B3:4F).
Comment Specifies a comment.

3 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-8 Printing Settings

These are the settings for printing and capturing screens on the HMI.
You can capture screens displayed on the HMI.

3-4 HMI Settings

3

3-4-8 Printing Settings

Item Description
Printing Settings
Color Mode Sets one of the following options for the number of colors or use of highlight-
ing:
• Color
• Grayscale
• Reverse Grayscale
Print With Title Sets whether to print the page title.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 19

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-4-9 Serial Port Settings

These settings are for the serial port.

Item Description
Serial port settings
purpose Select the purpose of the serial port. Select Connection with external
devices.
Communication Speed Select the communication speed of the serial port.
Data Bit Set the data bit.
Stop Bit Set the stop bit.
Parity Select the parity.

3 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-5 Security Settings

These settings are used to restrict the operations that can be performed on the HMI and register
accounts.

3-5 Security Settings

Setting Procedure for Security Settings
1 Double-click Security Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.
The Security Settings Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

Item Description
User Accounts Registers user accounts.
Roles and Access Levels Sets the access level for each role.
Security Settings Sets the level of operations to permit from the System Menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 21

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-6 Troubleshooter
These settings are used for the troubleshooter for the NJ/NX/NY series.
For details, refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Hardware User's Manual (Cat. No. V117) or
NA-series Programmable Terminal Hardware(-V1) User's Manual (Cat. No. V125).

3 - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-7 Language Settings

These settings are used for multi-language projects.

3-7 Language Settings

Project Language and System Language
There are two languages on the HMI.
• Project Language
The project language is displayed for the project that you create.
• System Language
The system language is displayed for the System Menu and for error messages displayed by the system.

The two language settings are managed as pairs. If you change the project language, the paired sys- 3
tem language will also change.

Additional Information

Changing the project language settings will affect the positions below. For items that have an
affect only in subroutines, refer to the technical information on the effects of culture in Micro-
soft’s Visual Basic.
• Date and time display format
• Decimal point and thousands separator
• Currency symbols
• Character string sort order

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 23

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

Language Setting Procedure

1 Double-click Language Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.
The Language Settings Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

(e)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Number Item Description
(a) Adds a language to the language list.

(b) Deletes the selected language from the language list.

(c) Moves the selected language one position up in the language list.

(d) Moves the selected language one position down in the language list.

(e) Language List Displays a list of the languages. The language at the top of the
list is treated as the default language.
Project Languages Sets the project language.
System Languages Sets the system language.
Software Keypads Sets the software keypad to be used.
Transfer to Device Sets whether or not the language is transferred to the HMI.
FontFamily *1 Sets the font that is set by default when an object is created.
FontSize *1 Sets the font size that is set by default when an object is created.
FontStyle *1 Sets the font style that is set by default when an object is created.

*1. Only appears when the Runtime version is 1.11 or higher.

Additional Information

You can clear the selection of the Transfer to Device Check Box so that the language files are
not transferred to the HMI. You can use this to delete unnecessary languages depending on the
destination of the HMI.

3 - 24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-8 Operation Log Settings

These settings are used for an Operation Log.

3-8 Operation Log Settings

Additional Information

To use the Operation Log, the media to save data specified in the Operation Log Settings must
be installed on the NA unit in a state where data can be written to it.

Item Description
Start Operation Log Activates or deactivates operation logging.
Target Device Specifies the media to save operation logs.
Target Folder Specifies the folder to save operation logs.
Operation when logging limit reached Specifies the operation to execute when the number of logs to be saved
in the log file reaches its upper limit.
Logging limit Specifies the limit of the number of logs to be saved in a single log file.
New operation log file generation Specifies the conditions for generating new log files.
interval
Operations to be logged Sets the operations to be logged.
Batch settings for objects Sets all “Operation Log” of the properties of the object.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 25

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

 Subject Operations of Operation Log

The following system operations of the NA unit are subject to operation logging. Select the Opera-
tion to be logged Check Box in Operation Log Settings to record these to Operation Log.

Operation to
Operation Description
be logged
Starting Startup When the Runtime starts up.
Runtime Exit When the Runtime stops.
Synchroniza- Start Project Transfer When a project data transfer with the NA unit starts.
tion Complete Project Transfer When a project data transfer with the NA unit completes.
Function key Function Key operation When a Function key is operated.
Language Set language When the project language is changed.
switching
IME change IME change When the IME type is changed.
Operation Disable touch input When the input operation from the touch panel is disabled.
locking Enable touch input When the input operation from the touch panel is enabled.
Screen saver Start screensaver When the screen saver starts.
End screensaver When the screen saver is exited.
VNC Connect to VNC server When a user logs in from a VNC client.
Disconnect VNC server When a VNC client logs out.
FTP Server Connect to FTP server When a user logs in from an FTP client.
Disconnect FTP server When an FTP client logs out.
FTP Client Connect with FTP Client When a user logs into the FTP server using the FTP client
function.
Disconnect with FTP Client When a user logs out from the FTP server using the FTP client
function.
Recipe Write recipe When recipe data is written to the controller.
Read recipe When recipe data is loaded from the controller.
Data logging Start Data logging When data logging starts.
Stop Data logging When data logging stops.
Operation Start Operation logging When operation logging starts.
Logging Stop Operation logging When operation logging stops.
System Change System settings When settings for the following items of the NA unit are
setting changed.
• Time
• Time zone
• NTP Settings
• System Languages
• Ethernet
• FTP Server
• VNC Server
• FINS
• Screen Brightness
Login/Logout Login When a user logs in in a state where there is no user currently
logged in.
Logout When a user logs out.
Switch user When a user logs in in a state where there is a user currently
logged in.
System Menu Show System Menu When the System Menu starts up.
Exit System Menu When the System Menu is exited.
Trouble Show Troubleshooter When the Troubleshooter starts up.
Shooter Exit Troubleshooter When the Troubleshooter is exited.
Operation log Show Operation Log Viewer When the Operation Log Viewer starts up.
Viewer Exit Operation Log Viewer When the Operation Log Viewer is exited.

3 - 26 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

Operation to
Operation Description
be logged
Safety Show Safety Monitor When the Safety Monitor starts up.
Monitor Exit Safety Monitor When the Safety Monitor is exited.

 Subject Objects of Operation Log and Events to be Recorded

3-8 Operation Log Settings

The subject objects of Operation Log and events to be recorded are shown below. Select the Oper-
ation Log Check Box in Properties of each object to record these to Operation Log.

Classification Object Events to be Recorded

Button Button object Click/Touch/Release
Momentary Button object Click/Touch/Release
Set Button object Click/Touch/Release
Reset Button object Click/Touch/Release
Toggle Button object Click/Touch/Release
Standard controls CheckBox object Click/Checked/Unchecked 3
Data Display object Touch/Release
Data Edit object Release
DateTime object Touch/Release
DropDown object SelectionChanged
Image object Touch/Release
Label object Touch/Release
ListBox object SelectionChanged
Radio Button object Touch/Checked/Unchecked
Slider object Release/LostMouseCapture/KeyUp/Val-
ueChanged
Tab Control object SelectionChanged
Text Box object Touch/Release
Shapes Curve object Touch/Release
Ellipse object Touch/Release
Line object Touch/Release
Polygon object Touch/Release
Polyline object Touch/Release
Rectangle object Touch/Release
Triangle object Touch/Release

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 27

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-9 HMI Clock

To set the clock in the HMI, select HMI Clock from the HMI Menu when you are online. Set the required
items and click the Apply Button to update the information in the HMI.

Item Description
Time Zone
Computer Displays the time zone of the computer.
HMI Sets the time zone of the HMI
Automatically adjust clock for Select this check box to enable automatically adjusting for daylight savings
DST time.
Date and time
Computer Displays the current date and time on the computer.
Synchronize with computer Updates the clock information on the HMI with the clock information from the
computer.
HMI Set the clock information on the HMI.

3 - 28 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-10 Updating the HMI Name

To change the HMI name, select Update HMI Name from the HMI Menu when you are online.

3-10 Updating the HMI Name

A confirmation dialog box is displayed. To update the HMI name that is set in the project, click the Yes
Button.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 29

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-11 Write Protecting the HMI

To write-protect the HMI, select Security - HMI Write Protection from the HMI Menu when you are
online.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the Yes Button to write-protect the HMI.

Only the project is write-protected. The project can still log data and write other data.

3 - 30 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-12 Clear All Memory

You can initialize the HMI.
When you perform the Clear All Memory operation, all data is cleared except for time data. To clear all
memory in the HMI, select Clear All Memory from the HMI Menu when you are online.

3-12 Clear All Memory

A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the OK Button to clear all memory.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 3 - 31

3 HMI Configuration and Setup

3-13 Resetting the HMI

You can reset the HMI.
To reset the HMI, select Reset HMI Device from the HMI Menu when you are online. A confirmation
dialog box is displayed. Click the Yes Button to reset the HMI.

3 - 32 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Creating the HMI Application
This section describes how to create the HMI application (pages, variables, subrou-
tines, etc.) with the Sysmac Studio.
4

4-1 Registering Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-1-1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-1-2 Registering Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1-3 Registering External Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-1-4 Searching for Unused Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-1-6 System-defined Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-1-7 Subroutine Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-2 Registering Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3 Creating Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3-1 Displaying Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-3-2 Registering Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-3-3 Page Property Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-3-4 Editing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-4 Setting Common Object Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-4-1 Registering User Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-4-2 Setting Controller Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-4-3 Registration for Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-4-4 Registering Data Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-4-5 Registering Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-4-6 Registering Custom Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-4-7 Setting Global Events and Corresponding Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4-4-8 Registering Global Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-4-9 Setting Up Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-4-10 Setting Up IAG Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-4-11 Registering Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-5 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-5-1 Subroutine Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-5-2 Precautions on Internal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-5-3 Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-5-4 Differences in Language Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4-1

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-6 Search and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

4-7 Font Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-8 IAG Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-9 Device Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-10 Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-10-1 Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-11 Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-11-1 Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-11-2 Build Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4-12 Offline Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4-13 Resource Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

4-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1 Registering Variables

4-1-1 Variables
A variable is a ‘container’ that holds data.

4-1 Registering Variables

The HMI supports the following types of variables.

Variable type Description

Global variables Global variables are defined by the user and can be accessed from anywhere in the
project. You can register up to 35,000 total in the entire project and up to 30,000 for
each connected device.*1
Global variables are declared in the HMI global variable table.
Global variables include external variables and internal variables, which are
described below.
External variables External variables are global variables that are used to access data in Controllers 4
and other connected devices.
External variables are assigned to device variables in the variable mapping.

4-1-1 Variables
Internal variables An internal variable can be used only within the HMI.
All global variables that are not external variables are internal variables.
System-defined System-defined variables are provided in advance in the HMI. The names and all
variables attributes are defined by the system. They have specific functions.
You cannot change the variable names or any other attributes of these variables.
Subroutine variables Subroutine variables are defined by the user and are used only within subroutines.
Subroutine variables are declared in Dim statements in page subroutines or global
subroutines.
You can use all of the data types that are supported by Visual Basic.
*1. For the Runtime version 1.02 or lower, the registerable numbers are up to 35,000 in the entire project, and up
to 20,000 for each connected device.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4-3

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1-2 Registering Global Variables

 Opening the Global Variable Tab Page
Double-click Global Variables under HMI - Data in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Global
Variables under HMI - Data and select Edit from the menu.

The global variable table is displayed in the Edit Pane.

The basic Sysmac Studio operations for the global variable table generally apply to HMIs. Refer to
the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for the basic operations.
However, the following items are different. Refer to 4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global
Variables on page 4-12.

Item Description
Name There are specific prohibited characters that apply to HMIs.
Data Type There are specific data types for HMIs.
AT You can set the device variables to which to assign the global variables. This setting is
not used for internal variables.
Update Rate You can select the interval at which to get values from the connected device. This set-
ting is used only for external variables.
Scaling You can select a conversion expression for the value obtained from the connected
device. This setting is used only for an external variable.

Additional Information

Even if you change the name of a previously registered global variable, the name of the vari-
able accessed from objects or subroutines will not change.

4-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Registering Global Variables from the Properties Window

Use the following procedure to add a global variable from the Properties Window for an object.
Example: Using the Properties Window for a Set Button

1 Open the Properties Window for the object, and enter a variable name in the Variable Box
under Behavior.

4-1 Registering Variables

2 Click the + Button to the right of the variable name that you entered.

4-1-2 Registering Global Variables

A dialog box appears to add a global variable.

3 Set a data type in Data Type Box.

4 Enter a comment in the Comment Box.

5 Click the Add Variable Button.

This completes adding a variable.

Additional Information

• You can also create an array variable by specifying the data type as follows:

• You can add a variable the same way for an object for which an expression is specified under
Behavior in the Properties Window.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4-5

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1-3 Registering External Variables

External Variables
External variables are global variables that are used to access data in connected devices.

Creating External Variables

The following two methods can be used to create external variables.
• In the variable mapping, map a global variable to a connected device variable.
• When creating a global variable, also register a variable in the device.

When using the variable mapping, you can create a new variable or select a previously created global
variable.
If you create a new external variable in the variable mapping, it will automatically be registered as a
global variable.

Refer to 3-3 Mapping Variables on page 3-7 for details on the variable mapping.

Attributes of External Variables

If you create a new external variable in the variable mapping, the following attributes are registered for
it in the global variable table.
Refer to 4-1-6 System-defined Variables on page 4-16 for details on the attributes of variables.

Changes to set-
Attribute Setting
tings
Name Specified variable name Possible.
Data Type Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection Possible.
User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119) for details on data type for the HMI
global variables based on data types for device variable.
Initial Value None Not possible.
AT Device_name.Device_variable_name Possible.
Retain Non-retained Not possible.
Constant None Not possible.
Update Rate 500 ms Possible.
Scaling None Possible.
Comment Specified comment Possible.

4-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Registering External Variables from the Properties Window

Use the following procedure to add an external variable that is mapped to a Controller variable from
the object Properties Window.
Example: Using the Properties Window for a Set Button

1 Open the Properties Window for the object, and enter a variable name in the Variable Box
under Behavior.

4-1 Registering Variables

2 Click the + Button to the right of the variable name that you entered.

4-1-3 Registering External Variables

A dialog box appears to add a global variable.

3 Set a data type in Data Type Box.

4 Enter a comment in the Comment Box.

5 Select the Map to Controller Variable Check Box.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4-7

4 Creating the HMI Application

6 Change the items in Controller Variable Details as needed.

7 Click the add or update the global variable button.

Variables are added to the device and HMI, and are automatically mapped.

Additional Information

• If an Array[0..3] of BOOL-type NJ_var1 array variable has already been registered in the
Controller, you can map the variable as an array variable by specifying the data type as fol-
lows:

• You can map a variable in the same way for an object for which an expression is specified
under Behavior in the Properties Window.
• When registering variables from properties, comments entered in the dialog box are regis-
tered into variables of each device.

4-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Registering External Variables from the Global Variable Table

Use the following procedure to add an external variable that is mapped to a Controller variable from
the Global Variable Table.

1 Double-click Global Variables under HMI - Data in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Global
Variables under HMI - Data and select Edit from the menu.

4-1 Registering Variables

4
2 Add a variable.

4-1-3 Registering External Variables

3 Right-click the variable and select Register To Controller from the menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4-9

4 Creating the HMI Application

4 Change the items in Controller Variable Details as needed, and click Add or Update Variable.

5 The global variable is registered in the controller.

Additional Information

• You cannot register multiple variables at once.

• You cannot register structure, union, or enumeration variables that use data types defined on
the device.
• When registering variables from the Global Variable Table, comments entered in the dialog
box are registered into variables of each device.

4 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1-4 Searching for Unused Variables

To search for unused variables, right-click HMI - Data - Global Variables, and select Search unused
variables from the menu that appears. Alternatively, select Edit - Search unused variables from the
menu.

1 Right-click Global Variables under HMI - Data and select Search unused variables from the
menu that appears.

4-1 Registering Variables

4

4-1-4 Searching for Unused Variables

2 Click OK.

3 Click OK.

4 The unused variables are selected in the global variable table.

Additional Information

If the variable name of the subroutine or action parameter is enclosed in double quotations and
specified as a text string, it will be handled as an unused variable.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 11

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global Variables

This section describes attributes and entry methods for global variables.

Attributes of Global Variables

 Name Attribute

Enter a text string for the name. Observe the following restrictions.
• You cannot use any symbols except for underscores.
• The first letter cannot be a number.
• The names are not case sensitive.
• You cannot use names that start with “_HMI”, “_eHMI_”, “_sHMI_”, “_uHMI_”, or “_SyxSPC_”.
• You cannot use names that are reserved for the Sysmac Studio or Visual Basic.
• You cannot use more than 127 characters.
• You cannot use three underscores in a row.
• You cannot redundantly use names that are already used for a device name, global subroutine,
keypad, page, or object name.

 Data Type Attribute

Enter a data type directly or select one from the list.

You can use the following data types, which are supported by Visual Basic. Arrays of the data types that
are supported by Visual Basic are also supported. If you specify an array, specify the element number
in parentheses after the data type in the same way as in Visual Basic.

Classifica- Data type

Data type Size Range of values
tion name
Basic data Boolean Boolean ― True or False
types Byte Byte 1 byte 0 to 255 (unsigned)
Char Char 2 bytes 0 to 65,535 (unsigned)
Date Date 8 bytes 0:00:00 (midnight) on January 1, 0001 through
11:59:59 PM on December 31, 9999
Decimal Decimal 16 bytes 0 through
+/-79,228,162,514,264,337,593,543,950,335
(+/-7.9...E+28) with no decimal point;
0 through +/-7.9228162514264337593543950335
with 28 places to the right of the decimal;
smallest nonzero number is
+/-0.0000000000000000000000000001 (+/-1E-28)
Double Double 8 bytes -1.79769313486231570E+308 through
-4.94065645841246544E-324 for negative values;
4.94065645841246544E-324 through
1.79769313486231570E+308 for positive values
Integer Integer 4 bytes -2,147,483,648 through 2,147,483,647 (signed)

4 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Classifica- Data type

Data type Size Range of values
tion name
Basic data Long Long 8 bytes -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 through
types 9,223,372,036,854,775,807 (9.2...E+18) (signed)
SByte SByte 1 byte -128 through 127 (signed)
Short Short 2 bytes -32,768 through 32,767 (signed)
Single Single 4 bytes -3.4028235E+38 through -1.401298E-45 for negative
values;
1.401298E-45 through 3.4028235E+38 for positive
values

4-1 Registering Variables

String String Variable 0 to approximately 2 billion Unicode characters
length*1 (UTF-16)
UInteger UInteger 4 bytes 0 through 4,294,967,295 (unsigned)
ULong ULong 8 bytes 0 through 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 (1.8...E+19)
(unsigned)
UShort UShort 2 bytes 0 to 65,535 (unsigned)
Derivative TimeSpan Structure that gives a time interval
data types Structures/ This is a user-defined data type that integrates different data types into a single
Unions/ group.
Enumerations You can name the data type.
4
Specify the name of the variables that use the user-defined data type, and one
of the member variables included in the group.

4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global Variables

*1. The length is fixed only when a Retain variable is specified. The maximum number of characters is specified
with the following notation.
String[*maximum_number_of_characters][(number_of_array_elements)]
Values in square brackets [ ] may be omitted. If a Retain variable is specified and the maximum number of
characters is not set, the maximum number of variables specified under HMI Settings - Device Settings -
Global Variables applies.

Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Device Connection User’s Manual (Cat. No. V119) for
information on which of the above HMI variable data types can be assigned to the data types of con-
nected device variables for different connected devices.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 13

4 Creating the HMI Application

 Initial Value Attribute

Specify a value for the variable for one of the following situations when the Retain attribute is not
specified.
• When the power supply is turned ON
• When you specify to initialize the value when the project is transferred

Enter a value directly or select an item from the list (the values in the list depend on the data type).
Select None for no initial value. You cannot specify the Initial Value attribute for an external variable.

Additional Information

If the box is left blank, the initial value of the variable will be as follows:
Data type Initial value
Boolean, Byte, Char, Decimal, Double, Integer, Long, 0
SByte, Short, Single, UInteger, ULong, or UShort
String Blank
Date January 1, 0001, 0:00:00 (AM 0:00)

 AT Attribute

This attribute is specified for external variables. Use the following format.
Device_name.Device_variable_name

4 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Retain Attribute

Specify whether to retain the value of the variable in the following cases.
• When the power supply is turned ON
• When you do not specify to initialize the value when the project is transferred
You cannot specify the Retain attribute for an external variable, structure variable, or union variable.

4-1 Registering Variables

You can specify up to 5,000 Retain variables (36,864 bytes). For version 1.08 or higher, a building
error occurs if the maximum number or maximum size is exceeded. The size depends on the data
type, as shown below. For String arrays, one element is counted as one variable. For example, Inte-
ger variable a(10) is counted as one variable, but String variable b(10) is counted as 10 variables.
Data type Non-volatile memory consumption (bytes)
Boolean 1
Byte 1
Char 2
Date 8
Decimal 16
4
Double 8
Integer 4

4-1-5 Attributes and Entry Methods for Global Variables

Long 8
SByte 1
Short 2
Single 4
String 2 × Number of characters + 3
UInteger 4
ULong 8
UShort 2
TimeSpan 8
Structure Cannot be set.
Union Cannot be set.
Enumeration 4

 Constant Attribute

If you set the Constant attribute, you can set the initial value of the variable when the project is
downloaded, but you cannot overwrite the value afterward.
You cannot specify the Constant attribute for an external variable.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 15

4 Creating the HMI Application

 Update Rate Attribute

The update interval with the connected device is specified for external variables. If None is set for an
external variable, communications are only performed with the connected device, such as when a
value is written to the variable. Periodic communications are not performed. This attribute is not
valid for internal variables.

 Scaling
Specify a conversion expression to apply to the values of the connected device for external vari-
ables. The external variable for which scaling is set will be cast as the Double type. Therefore, it is
necessary to set Double in Data Type regardless of the data type of the device variable.
For information on setting the conversion expression, refer to 4-4-11 Registering Scaling on page
4-52.

 Comment Attribute

Enter a comment. When the device variable comment is changed for an external device, the change
is automatically applied.

4-1-6 System-defined Variables

System-defined Variables
System-defined variables are internal variables that are pre-defined by the system. All system-defined
variable attributes are fixed. The names and all other attributes of these variables are defined, and spe-
cial functions are assigned to them. You cannot change the names or any other attributes.

• You can use the system-defined variables for an HMI as soon as you register an HMI in the project. It
is not necessary to register system-defined variables in the global variable table.
• System-defined variables that are related to an HMI start with “_HMI_”.

4 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

System-defined Variables
 System-related Variables

Data
Variable name Meaning Description R/W
type
_HMI_Brightness Brightness Sets the brightness of the screen. Integer R/W
_HMI_CanEjectSDCard Can Eject SD Tells whether you can remove the SD Boolean R
Card Memory Card.

4-1 Registering Variables

True: Ejection is possible, False: Ejec-
tion is not possible.
_HMI_ConnectedVNCClient Connected num- Gives number of client via VNC. Integer R
Count ber of VNC Client
_HMI_CurrentPage Current Page Sets the name of the currently dis- String R/W
Name played page.
_HMI_CurrentPageIndex Current Page Sets the number of the currently dis- Integer R/W
Number played page.
_HMI_DateTime System Time Gives the system clock time as the Date- R
local time. Time 4
_HMI_Hour Current Hour Gives the hour in the current time. Integer R
_HMI_IsBatteryLow Low Battery Volt- Gives True if the battery voltage has Boolean R

4-1-6 System-defined Variables

age dropped below a specific level.
_HMI_IsDataInput Data Entry in Gives True when a data entry object is Boolean R
Progress selected.
_HMI_IsPageSwitching Page Switching in Gives True while page switching pro- Boolean R
Progress cessing is in progress and False after
processing is completed.
_HMI_IsScreenSaverActive Screen Saver Sta- Tells whether the screen saver is Boolean R/W
tus active.
True: Active, False: Not active.
_HMI_ManagedRAMInUse Usage of Man- Gives the total bytes of managed RAM ULong R
aged RAM that is currently allocated to some pro-
cess.
_HMI_Millisecond Current Millisec- Gives the milliseconds in the current Integer R
onds time.
_HMI_Minute Current Minutes Gives the minutes in the current time. Integer R
_HMI_RAMInUse Usage of RAM Gives the total bytes of RAM that is ULong R
currently allocated to some process.
_HMI_RAMTotal Total RAM Gives the total bytes of RAM that the ULong R
system is using or can use. This is not
the currently usable amount of RAM.
_HMI_RunSignal Run Signal The value changes approximately Boolean R
every second while the HMI is operat-
ing.
_HMI_Second Current Seconds Gives the seconds in the current time. Integer R

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 17

4 Creating the HMI Application

 Alarm-related Variables

Data
Variable name Meaning Description R/W
type
_HMI_AlarmCount Alarm Count Gives the total number of alarms that Integer R
have occurred, been cleared, or been
acknowledged. The value is initialized
when the alarm history is cleared.
_HMI_AlarmsClearedNotAck Cleared Unac- Gives the number of alarms that are Integer R
knowledged cleared but not acknowledged.
Alarms
_HMI_AlarmsNotAck Unacknowledged Gives the number of alarms that are Integer R
Alarm Count not acknowledged.
_HMI_AlarmsRaised Current Alarm Gives the number of current alarms. Integer R
Count
_HMI_AlarmsRaisedNotAck Unacknowledged Gives the number of current alarms Integer R
Current Alarm that are not acknowledged.
Count

 User and Security

Data
Variable name Meaning Description R/W
type
_HMI_CurrentUserName Current User Gives the name of the user that is cur- String R
Name rently logged in.
_HMI_CurrentUserRole Current User Gives the authority (role) of the user String R
Authority that is currently logged in.

System Enumeration Variable Table

The following table shows the enumeration variables that are used to control the HMI.
Enumerators are specified for input enumeration variables instead of numerical values.

Data type name Description

_eHMI_ALARM_STATUS Specifies the alarm status.
Acknowledged: Acknowledged
All: All
Cleared: Already cleared.
ClearedAckNotRequired: Already cleared and no need to
acknowledge.
ClearedAcknowledged: Already cleared and acknowledged.
ClearedUnacknowledged: Already cleared but not yet acknowl-
edged.
Raised: Raised.
RaisedAckNotRequired: Raised and no need to acknowledge.
RaisedAcknowledged: Raised and already acknowledged.
RaisedUnacknowledged: Raised but not yet acknowledged.
Unacknowledged: Not yet acknowledged.
_eHMI_BUZZER_TYPE Specifies the buzzer mode.
ContinuousBuzzer: Continuous buzzer
IntermittentLongPulse: Intermittent long buzzer
IntermittentShortPulse: Intermittent short buzzer

4 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Data type name Description

_eHMI_COLUMN Specifies the column for sorting or filtering the user alarms
viewer.
AlarmCode: Alarm code
All: All
DateAndTime: Date and time
Group: Group
LoggedInUser: Logged-in user
Message: Message

4-1 Registering Variables

Name: Name
Priority: Priority
Status: Status
ElapsedTime: Elapsed time
AdditionalInformation: Additional Information
_eHMI_EXPOSETTYPE Specifies the search target of the Safety Monitor.
All: All variables
InputVariable: Input to Safety CPU
4
OutputVariable: Output from Safety CPU
_eHMI_FTPFileType Specifies the target when using an FTP client.

4-1-6 System-defined Variables

All: All
File: Files only
Directory: Folders only
_eHMI_GRAPH_CURSOR Specifies the cursor for graphs.
Cursor1: Cursor 1
Cursor2: Cursor 2
_eHMI_GRAPH_DIRECTION Specifies the direction of graphs.
Left: Left
Right: Right
_eHMI_GRAPH_ZOOM_TARGET Specifies the expansion mode for graphs.
Both: Both
Horizontal: Horizontal direction only
Vertical: Vertical direction only
_eHMI_IME_LANGUAGE Specifies the IME input mode.
CurrentSystemLanguage: System language
Japanese: Japanese
Korean: Korean
SimplifiedChinese: Simplified Chinese
TraditionalChinese: Traditional Chinese
_eHMI_KNOWN_PATH Specifies the medium.
SDCard: SD card
USBMemory: USB memory

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 19

4 Creating the HMI Application

Data type name Description

_eHMI_PRIORITY Specifies the priority of the items to be displayed in the user
alarms viewer.
All: All
UserFaultLevel1: User alarm level 1
UserFaultLevel2: User alarm level 2
UserFaultLevel3: User alarm level 3
UserFaultLevel4: User alarm level 4
UserFaultLevel5: User alarm level 5
UserFaultLevel6: User alarm level 6
UserFaultLevel7: User alarm level 7
UserFaultLevel8: User alarm level 8
UserInformation: Information
_eHMI_SERVICE_STATE Specifies the state of the service.
Running: Running
Suspended: Suspended
_eHMI_SERVICE_TYPE Specifies the type of the service.
VNCServer: VNC server
_eHMI_SORT_ORDER Specifies the sort order of the user alarms viewer.
Ascending: Ascending
Descending: Descending
_eHMI_TROUBLESHOOTER_PAGE Specifies the screen displayed for the troubleshooter.
ActiveControllerEvents: Controller error list screen
ActiveUserEvents: User error list screen
ControllerEventLogs: Controller error log list screen
UserEventLogs: User error log list screen

System Structure Variable Table

The following table shows the structure variables that are used to control the HMI.

Data type name Variable Data type Description

_sHMI_VNC_CLIENT_INFO Comment String Specifies a comment.
IPAddress String Specifies an IP address.
MACAddress String Specifies a MAC address.

4-1-7 Subroutine Variables

Subroutine Variables
Subroutine variables can be used only with subroutines. Subroutine variables conform to Visual Basic
specifications.
Refer to the NA-series Subroutine Reference for details.

4 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-2 Registering Data Types

 Registering Data Types
You can combine existing data types to define and register a new data type.
To use a data type that was registered with the Data Type Editor, just select it from the data types in
the Variable Editor. You can define data types that are structures or enumerations.

4-2 Registering Data Types

 Opening the Data Types Tab Page
1 Double-click Data Types under HMI - Data in the Multiview Explorer, or right-click Data Types
under HMI - Data and select Edit from the menu.

The Data Type Editor is displayed.

The basic operating procedures for the Data Type Editor are the same throughout the Sysmac Stu-
dio. For basic usage instructions, refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No.
W504). The differences are as follows:
• You cannot register unions.
• You cannot set the offset type, offset bytes, or offset bits.

Additional Information

You cannot refer to data type of the connected device by subroutine or other means. If you
want to use enumerations defined by the connected device, use variables mapped as enumer-
ated variables.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 21

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-3 Creating Pages

One page represents one screen in the HMI project.
You can arrange various objects on a page to achieve the required functions.

There are two types of pages, as described in the following table.

Page Type in the Page Behavior Sizes (width and height) Application
Main Fixed for each model Basic pages
Pages can be layered.
You can specify a transparent color
and specify a background page.
Popup You can set the page sizes as long Warning dialog boxes and other
as they are not larger than the main applications
page size.

Main Pages Popup Pages

You can specify

any size that is
not larger than
The maximum the maximum
size is fixed. size.
You can specify any
size that is not larger
than the maximum size.
The maximum size is fixed.

 Main Pages
The main pages are the basic pages. You can create applications to call popup pages from main
pages or move to other main pages. You can place up to 450 objects on one main page. You cannot
place more than one Trend Graph, Broken-line Graph, or Media Player object on one page. Note
that in Soft-NA, if Runtime version 1.16 or higher is used, up to a total of two graphs, a Trend Graph
and a Broken-line Graph, can be arranged on one page.

You can create layers of main pages.

You can specify a background page to make the top layer transparent and place a specified page
underneath it. You can layer up to five pages including the main pages.
You can create a common page, e.g., with a toolbar, to display with all other pages and then specify
it as the background page so that you do not have to create it more than once.
Main pages
Page 1: Transparent background

Page 2: Transparent background

Page 3: Background color

Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

4 - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Popup Pages
Popup pages are called from main pages. Use them to display warnings and other information. You
can place up to 450 objects on one popup page. The following limitations apply to popup pages.
• You cannot display multiple popup pages at the same time.
• You cannot place Trend Graph, Broken-line Graph, Tab Control, or Media Player objects on a
popup page.
• The background color Alpha is disregarded. For this reason, if a transparent color is set, it will be
drawn as a non-transparent color.

4-3-1 Displaying Pages

4-3 Creating Pages

Click Pages under HMI in the Multiview Explorer.

The pages are displayed under Pages.

4-3-1 Displaying Pages

4-3-2 Registering Pages
The project contains one page by default, and you can add more pages as required.

Registering New Pages

1 Right-click Pages under HMI and select Add - Page from the menu.

A new page, Page1, is added under Pages.

Deleting Pages
1 Right-click the page to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from the menu.
A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click the Yes Button. The page is deleted.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 23

4 Creating the HMI Application

Copying and Pasting Pages

1 Select the page to copy in the Multiview Explorer and press the Ctrl + C Keys. Or, right-click the
page and select Copy from the menu.

The page is copied.

2 Select Pages in the Multiview Explorer and press the Ctrl + V Keys. Or, right-click Pages and
select Paste from the menu.

The copied page is registered with “Copy_1_of_” added to the front of the name of the page that
was copied. All of the objects on the page are also copied.

Additional Information

• You can change the names of pages. Right-click the page and select Rename from the
menu.
• If you copy a page from another product and a page with the same name already exists, the
page will be named as a copy.
• When the page name is changed, the change is executed across the entire project. The
replace results are displayed in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page.

4 - 24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-3-3 Page Property Settings

You can set properties for the pages.

Setting Properties
1 Right-click in a location in the Edit Pane where there is no object and select Properties.

2 Set the properties for the page in the Properties Window that is displayed.
Item classifi-

4-3 Creating Pages

Property Description Main pages Popup pages
cation
General Name Sets the name of the OK OK
page. All names must be
unique.
Type The object type is dis- Display only Display only
played. Page is displayed
for a page.
Appearance Background Color Sets the background OK OK 4
color. A transparent page
will automatically be set if

4-3-3 Page Property Settings

a background page is
specified.
Behavior PageType Sets the type of page. OK OK
BackgroundPage Sets a page that is over- OK ---
lapped as the back-
ground.
AutoNavigateKeypads If you select this check OK OK
box, the keypad is auto-
matically displayed
according to the Data
Input Order settings.
DisplayMode If you select Modal, no --- OK
operations are possible on
the main page while a
popup page is displayed.
If you select Modeless,
main page operations are
possible while a popup
page is displayed.
Moveable If you select this check --- OK
box, the popup page can
be moved.
CloseOnPageChange If you select this check --- OK
box, the popup page is
automatically closed when
the page is changed.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 25

4 Creating the HMI Application

Item classifi-
Property Description Main pages Popup pages
cation
Layout Position (Let, Top) Sets the display position --- OK
of the popup page. If you
select Custom, the coor-
dinates of the top left cor-
ner of the page are
specified with (Left,Top).
Size (Width, Height) Sets the size of the page. Display only OK
The maximum size is the
physical size of the
screen.
OK: Can be edited, Display only: Cannot be edited, ---: Property does not exist.

Click the arrowhead ( ) at the right of each item to make selections.

If you select a Popup for the Behavior setting, you can increase and decrease the Size (Width,

Height) of the Layout with the arrowheads on the right side of the box after selecting the
Detail mode and the size to change (left: width, right: height).

4 - 26 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-3-4 Editing Pages

You can arrange objects on the pages to achieve the required functions.

Additional Information

Sysmac Studio may end abnormally if many objects grouped together are copied and pasted.
Take care to prevent the number of objects from excessively exceeding the maximum number
per page by pasting.

4-3 Creating Pages

Positioning Objects
Drag objects from the Toolbox to position them on a page.

4-3-4 Editing Pages

Moving Objects
To move an object, click the object and drag it while the cross cursor is displayed.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 27

4 Creating the HMI Application

Resizing Objects
Click one of the resize handles around the object and drag it while the resizing cursor is displayed.

Rotating Objects
Click the rotation handle to the upper right of the object and drag it while the angle is displayed in the
center of the object.

4 - 28 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Changing Object Labels

You can directly change the label of an object by selecting it and performing one of the following
operations.
• Press the F2 Key.
• Double-click the left mouse button.
• Right-click and select Edit.
• Click the Edit Button on the Toolbar.

4-3 Creating Pages

The following objects are supported for this function:
4
• All the button objects including Buttons, Momentary Buttons, Set Buttons, Reset Buttons, and
Toggle Buttons

4-3-4 Editing Pages

• All the lamp objects including Bit Lamps and Data Lamps
• Label objects
• Text Box objects
• Check Box objects
• Radio Button objects

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 29

4 Creating the HMI Application

Duplicating Objects
You can create the specified number of duplicate objects in the vertical and/or horizontal direction
based on the selected object or objects.
You can also duplicate the object or objects by specifying an offset value for an array variable.

1 Select the object to duplicate.

To duplicate multiple objects at the same time, select all the objects to be duplicated.

2 Right-click the selected object and select Create Duplicate Objects… from the popup menu.
A dialog appears in the Edit Pane to specify object duplication. Specify the number of duplicate
objects and the direction.

If a Value Other Than 0 Is Specified in the Horizontal Increase and Vertical Increase Box:
If an array variable has been specified for the object, you can duplicate the object by adding the
specified offset value to the element number.

Set As Default
Changes the initial value of the object's properties.
Default value registration applies only to frequently used objects, such as buttons. Properties that have
a different setting for each object, such as variables, cannot be registered as a default value.

Additional Information

• The object default value is registered for each object type and managed as a project.
• The default values that have been set in a project property will be applied when the object
properties are set to initial values. For example, when an object is copied from one project to
another project, the default values set in the destination project will be applied to the initial
values of the object properties.
• In the case of version control, the default values are out of scope of the version control.
Although the functions of the default values can be used, history control is not supported.

4 - 30 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

 Changing default value

Follow the procedure below to set default value. The default value will be applied to the object's
properties if it has been set to the property details.

1 Set the object properties to the state you wish to set as default value.

4-3 Creating Pages

4
2 Right-click the object and select Set As Default in the menu that appears.

4-3-4 Editing Pages

3 An object with the same settings can be created by dragging and dropping the object from the
tool box.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 31

4 Creating the HMI Application

 Returning the default value to the initial state

Follow the procedure below to return the default value to the initial state. Note that this proce-
dure returns the default value of all objects to the initial state.

1 Select Reset Default Value in the Project menu.

2 A confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK.

4 - 32 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Editing with the Toolbar

The functions that are commonly used to edit pages are provided in the Toolbar.

Code View
This button displays the Code Editor.

Group

4-3 Creating Pages

This button creates a group of objects.

Ungroup
This button ungroups previously grouped objects.

Edit
This button is used to edit graphic objects, labels of Button or Lamp objects, and other objects.
4
Rotate Right 90 Degrees
This button rotates an object 90° clockwise.

4-3-4 Editing Pages

Rotate Left 90 Degrees
This button rotates an object 90° counterclockwise.

Flip Vertical
This button flips a graphic object vertically.

Flip Horizontal
This button flips a graphic object horizontally.

Bring to Front
This button moves an object to the front.

Bring Forward
This button moves an object toward the front.

Send Backward
This button moves an object toward the back.

Send to Back
This button moves an object to the back.

Align Left
This button aligns the left edges of the selected objects.

Align Center Horizontal

This button aligns the centers of the selected objects vertically.

Align Right
This button aligns the right edges of the selected objects.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 33

4 Creating the HMI Application

Align Top
This button aligns the top edges of the selected objects.

Align Center Vertical

This button aligns the centers of the selected objects horizontally.

Align Bottom
This button aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects.

Distribute Horizontally
This button positions the centers of the objects at equal distances horizontally.

Distribute Vertically
This button positions the centers of the objects at equal distances vertically.

To Previous Tab Page

This button displays the previous tab page.

To Next Tab Page

This button displays the next tab page.

Data Input Order Setting

This button changes the mode to the one to set data input order, and specifies the input order of
objects.

Variable Display Mode

This button switches to the mode that displays the variables or expressions set for the object.

Variable Name
In the variable display mode, the variable name or expression is displayed for the selected object.

Simulation Mode
This button changes the mode to the one to confirm object state.

Simulation Index
This button switches the index and lets you confirm the display state of objects.

Change Language
This box changes the project language that is displayed in the Edit Pane. When Display AllLan-
guages is selected, text in all languages is displayed at once.

4 - 34 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

This section describes the settings for functions that are shared by the entire HMI project.
The following functions are provided.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

• User alarms
• Controller events
• Data logging
• Data groups
• Recipes
• Custom keypads
• Global events
• Global subroutines
• Resources
• Imported IAGs
• Scale Transformations
4
Additional Information

4-4-1 Registering User Alarms

If the text string contains a control code, unexpected behavior may occur when it is used in an
object. Be careful that a control code is not included when copying and pasting from other
applications.

4-4-1 Registering User Alarms

User Alarms
You can specify conditions for specified variables to display user messages when the conditions are
met.
You can use this to record information when errors occur, when operation is started, etc.

Registering a New User Alarm

You manage user alarms by group.
The groups are displayed in the User Alarms Viewer and are helpful in organizing information.

1 Right-click HMI under User Alarms in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Group from the
menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 35

4 Creating the HMI Application

Group1 is added under User Alarms.

2 Double-click the new group.

A tab page to edit the group is displayed in the Edit Pane so that you can register user alarms.

Additional Information

You can import or export the user alarm settings using the Excel workbook format. Refer to
11-4 Import/Export User Alarm on page 11-7.

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Groups

You can delete, copy, and paste groups using the same procedures as those that you use for pages.

4-4-2 Setting Controller Events

Events
Events are the errors, changes of states, or user-defined occurrences that occur in the controller.
For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W501), NJ/NX-series
Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503), and NY-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W564-E1).

4 - 36 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

User Events
User events include the errors and information defined by users, and can be triggered by commands
from the controller.
You can specify on the NA’s NJ/NX/NY-series troubleshooter, the user screens to be switched to

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

from the troubleshooter screen when a detailed user event of the controller is displayed.

Registering User Events

4-4-2 Setting Controller Events

To switch a detailed user event screen of the troubleshooter to a user screen, you must specify the
event table for the controller and the transition destination screen that corresponds to each event.

1 Specify the event table of the user events in the project for the controller.

2 Double-click User Events under HMI - Controller Events in the Multiview Explorer of the proj-
ect for the HMI, or right-click User Events under HMI - Controller Events and select Edit from
the menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 37

4 Creating the HMI Application

The User Event Editor is displayed.

3 Select the controller for which to perform the settings.

Select the target controller from the drop-down list at the top of the Edit Pane.

4 Right-click on the grid and select Add from the menu.

5 Specify the event codes for the user events.

6 Specify the user screens to use as the transition destinations.

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting User Events

You can delete, copy, and paste user events using the same procedures as those that you use for
pages.

4 - 38 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4-3 Registration for Data Logging

Data Logging

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

You can use data logging to store the changes in the values of specified variables over time.
You can display the saved data with Trend Graph objects. You can also save this data to external files.

Registering a New Data Set

To log data, you must create one or more data sets. You can create different data sets to change the
location where the data is saved.

1 Right-click HMI - Data Logging in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Data Set from the
menu.

4-4-3 Registration for Data Logging

DataSet0 is added under Data Logging.

2 Double-click the new data set.

A tab page to make settings for the data set is displayed in the Edit Pane. You can set the vari-
ables to log, the storage locations, and other parameters.

Additional Information

You can copy the data set settings to Excel or another spreadsheet application to edit the set-
tings.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 39

4 Creating the HMI Application

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Data Sets

You can delete, copy, and paste data sets using the same procedures as those that you use for pages.

4-4-4 Registering Data Groups

Data Groups
You can register the data groups that are displayed as broken-line graphs.
You can register multiple series of data as a data group. You can also register multiple variables or
array variables in each data series.

Registering a New Data Group

To display a broken-line graph, you must create a data group. A maximum of 32 groups can be regis-
tered. You can specify up to 20 series of data for a single group.

1 Right-click HMI - Data Groups in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Data Groups form
the menu.

DataGroup0 is added under Data Groups.

4 - 40 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

2 Double-click the new data group.

A tab page to perform settings for the data group is displayed in the Edit Pane. You can specify
variables to be displayed, as well ad other parameters.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

4

4-4-4 Registering Data Groups

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Data Groups
You can delete, copy, and paste data groups using the same procedures as those that you use for
pages.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 41

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4-5 Registering Recipes

Recipes
A recipe is used to write data (numeric data or text strings) that was set in advance in the HMI to all of
the specified variables as a group or to read all of the specified variables as a group.
You can manipulate the registered recipe data with Recipe Viewer objects.

Registering a New Recipe

To use recipes you must create them.

1 Right-click HMI - Recipe in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Recipe Template from the
menu.

Recipe0 is added under Recipes.

2 Double-click the new Recipe0. A tab page to make settings for Recipe0 is displayed in the Edit
Pane. You can set the variables to use and other parameters.

4 - 42 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Additional Information

• You can copy the recipe settings to Excel or another spreadsheet application to edit the set-
tings.
• Restrictions relating to text that can be used in recipe names are as follows.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

Restrictions Common to All Runtime Versions
• Names must begin with an alphabet character or an underscore (_).
• Alphabet characters, numbers and underscores can be used.
• When beginning a name with an underscore, at least one alphabet character or number
must be used.
• Names beginning with _HMI, _eHMI_, _sHMI_, _uHMI_, and _SyxSPC_ cannot be used.
• Names that are reserved for Sysmac Studio or Visual Basic cannot be used.
• Names must be within 127 characters.
Restrictions in Runtime Version 1.16 or Earlier
• Symbols except for underscores cannot be used.
Restrictions in Runtime Version 1.17 or Later
• Symbols except for comma (,) and double quotation marks (") can be used. 4

4-4-5 Registering Recipes

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Recipes
You can delete, copy, and paste recipes using the same procedures as those that you use for pages.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 43

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4-6 Registering Custom Keypads

Custom Keypads
You can specify the colors, layouts, and other properties of buttons to create keypads.
You can manage custom keypads by creating groups in which to register multiple keypads including
Boolean Keypad, Numeric Keypad, Hexadecimal Keypad, QWERTY Keypad, DateTime Keypad, and
TimeSpan Keypad.

Registering a New Custom Keypad

To create a custom keypad, you must first create a custom keypad group. You can register up to 50
groups.

1 Right-click HMI - Custom Keypads in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Custom Keypad
Group from the menu.

“Group0” is added under Custom Keypads.

2 Right-click the new custom keypad group, and select Add and then select a custom keypad
from the menu.

4 - 44 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

3 Double-click the new custom keypad.

A tab page to edit the custom keypad is displayed in the Edit Pane. You can set the layout,
design, and other parameters for the objects.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

4

4-4-6 Registering Custom Keypads

Applying a Custom Keypad
To use a custom keypad, you must specify the custom keypad group to use on the Language Settings
Tab Page.

1 Double-click Language Settings under Configuration and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Select a custom keypad group from the drop-down list of the Software Keypads in the Edit
Pane.

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Custom Keypads or Custom Keypad

Groups
You can delete, copy, and paste custom keypads or custom keypad groups using the same procedures
as those that you use for pages.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 45

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4-7 Setting Global Events and Corresponding Actions

Global Events
Global events occur at the project level and do not belong to any specific page.
When a global event occurs, the action that is assigned to the event is executed.

 Global Events
Global events include function key operations, changes in the values of variables, starting the proj-
ect, etc. A list of the events that you can set is provided in A-1 Events and Actions on page A-2.

 Actions
You can specify the action to perform when a global event occurs from a list of predefined actions.
Actions include executing global subroutines and other system-defined operations. A list of the
actions that you can set is provided in A-1 Events and Actions on page A-2.

Setting Up Global Events

To set up a global event, you select the global event and then set the action to execute when the event
occurs.

1 Right-click HMI - Global Events in the Multiview Explorer and select Edit from the menu. Or,
double-click HMI - Global Events.

2 A tab page to make settings for the global event is displayed in the Edit Pane.

3 Click in the column on the right to select the event to set from the event list.

4 - 46 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

A global event is added.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

4 In the Actions row below the new global event, click in the right column and select the action to
perform for the event from the action list.

4-4-7 Setting Global Events and Corresponding Actions

5 When you add global events, they are numbered serially from 0 in the order that you add them.

Deleting Global Events

To delete all of the settings for global events, right-click the Events header at the top and select Reset.

To delete an individual event, click the Button on the right edge of the event.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 47

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-4-8 Registering Global Subroutines

Global Subroutines
You can register global subroutines, which you can then call from anywhere in the project.
You can register common subroutines that do not rely on page conditions to make subroutines easier to
maintain.

Registering a New Subroutine Group

To register global subroutines, you must create one or more subroutine groups. You can use subroutine
groups to separate subroutines by purpose.

1 Right-click HMI - Global Subroutines in the Multiview Explorer and select Add -Group from
the menu.

SubroutineGroup1 is added under Subroutine Groups.

2 Double-click the new subroutine group. A tab page for the Code Editor is displayed in the Edit
Pane.

4 - 48 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Subroutine Groups

You can delete, copy, and paste subroutine groups using the same procedures as those that you use
for pages.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

4-4-9 Setting Up Resources

Resources
Resources are the text strings, movies, still images, and documents that are displayed for objects and
alarms on user pages.
You can use Resources to manage all of the text strings, images, files, and other resources that you
use in a project.
For multi-language projects, you can set resources for each project language.

Setting Up Resources 4

To set up a resource, select the resource to set up and then make the settings.

4-4-9 Setting Up Resources

1 Right-click HMI - Resources - Root in the Multiview Explorer and select Edit from the menu.
Or, double-click HMI - Resources - Root.

2 A tab page to make settings for resources is displayed in the Edit Pane. You can select the
resource to set and make the settings.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 49

4 Creating the HMI Application

Additional Information

• You can import or export resource settings using the Excel workbook format. Refer to 11-5
Import/Export Resources on page 11-13.
• To save the selected file, right-click on the grid and select Save file from the menu.

Deletion of Unused Resources

Resources that are not used can be deleted by using the following procedure.

Additional Information

In deletion of unused resources, resources expressly assigned with a resource ID in the project
are recognized as used resources. For this reason, resources for which the resource ID is
known only at execution, such as dynamic links, are handled as unused resources. As a func-
tion for individually selecting deletion targets is not provided, make use of groups to avoid the
deletion of resources that must not to be deleted.
Moreover, as unused resources cannot be restored once they have been deleted, backing up
the project before executing a deletion is recommended.

1 Right-click HMI - Resources in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete Unused Resources
from the menu.

2 Select the check box of the group to execute deletion, and click Execute.

4 - 50 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

3 Check the text in the dialog box, then click the check box and click Execute.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

4 When the dialog box below disappears, this indicates that deletion is completed.

4-4-10 Setting Up IAG Resources

4
IAG Resources

4-4-10 Setting Up IAG Resources

IAG resources are used within IAGs on user pages. When you place an IAG on a page, the resources
for the IAG are automatically registered.

The languages that are displayed by the IAG resources are determined by the project languages. The
resources that are set in advance for the IAGs are displayed for the IAG resources. If a language that is
not included in an IAG is set as a project language, the resources will be blank by default.

Setting Up Resources
To set up an IAG resource, select the IAG resource to set up and then make the settings.

1 Right-click the IAG resource to edit under HMI - Imported IAGs in the Multiview Explorer and
select Edit from the menu. Or, double-click the resource.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 51

4 Creating the HMI Application

2 A tab page to make settings for IAG resources is displayed in the Edit Pane. The procedures
are the same as for other resources, but you can change only the contents of the resources that
are in the IAGs.

Additional Information

• To delete all Imported IAGs not used in the project, right-click [Imported IAGs] and select
[Delete not used IAG] from the menu.
• To save the selected file, right-click on the grid and select Save file from the menu.

4-4-11 Registering Scaling

Scaling
Scaling is used to transform displayed numeric values by specifying a multiplier and offset value.
To perform the settings for each object, open the object properties and set the parameters for scaling
under Behavior.
You can perform the settings for individual variables on the Global Variables Table.
Example:In this example, a multiplier of 100 and an offset of 50 are specified for an integer variable (int-
Sample):

Value of intSample Calculation formula Displayed value

0 50+0×100 50
1 50+1×100 150
2 50+2×100 250
100 50+100×100 10050

4 - 52 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Registering a New Scaling

You can register a maximum of 1,000 scaling settings.

1 Right-click HMI - Scale Transformations in the Multiview Explorer, and select Edit from the
menu. Or, double-click HMI - Scale Transformations.

4-4 Setting Common Object Functions

2 A tab page to perform settings for the scaling is displayed in the Edit Pane.
4

4-4-11 Registering Scaling

3 Right-click in the grid and select Add from the menu.

4 Specify the scale name, multiplier, offset, and other items.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 53

4 Creating the HMI Application

Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Scalings

To delete all of the settings for scaling, select all the items and then right-click and select Delete from
the menu.

To delete an individual scaling, click the button at the bottom left of the setting pane.

Precautions for Correct Use

When rounding values to the nearest integer, ".5" is rounded to the nearest even-number inte-
ger, as shown in the following examples.
Value before rounding Value after rounding
1.2 1
1.5 2
1.8 2
2.5 2 (not 3)

4 - 54 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-5 Subroutines

Subroutines
Subroutines are Visual Basic programs that the user can create. You create subroutines under Subrou-
tines in the HMI project.

Precautions for Correct Use

This manual describes only aspects that are different from the specifications standardized by

4-5 Subroutines
Microsoft Corporation. For any specifications not given in this manual, refer to commercially
available reference materials.

Subroutines
There are global subroutines and page subroutines, as described below. 4

 Global Subroutines
Global subroutines are shared by the entire project.
You create global subroutines under Global Subroutines in the HMI project. You set CallSubroutine
as the action in a global event, object event, or user alarms event to call a global subroutine.
You can also call a global subroutine from a page subroutine or from another global subroutine.

 Page Subroutines
Page subroutines are specific to one page.
You create page subroutines with the Code Editor for a page in the HMI project.
You can directly create the subroutines to execute in the events for individual objects on pages.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 55

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-5-1 Subroutine Execution

You can execute subroutines in the following ways.
• Execution from Global Events
You can execute a global subroutine from a global event.
• Execution from Page and Object Events
You can execute a page subroutine or global subroutine from a page or object event.
• Execution from User Alarm Events
You can execute a global subroutine from a user alarm event.

Execution from Global Events

The following example shows how to use a global event to execute a global subroutine.
In this example, settings are made to execute the global subroutine when the F1 Key is pressed.

1 Display the global events and select F1KeyPress as the event.

2 Select CallSubroutine as the action.

3 For the subroutine name, specify the name of a previously created subroutine in the following
format: Subroutine_group.Subroutine_name

4 - 56 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Execution from Objects

The following example shows how to use an object event to execute a subroutine.
In this example, settings are made to execute the subroutine when a Button object is pressed.

1 Select the Button object and display the events and actions.

4-5 Subroutines
4

2 Select Click as the event.

4-5-1 Subroutine Execution

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 57

4 Creating the HMI Application

3 Select CallSubroutine as the action.

4 Specify the subroutine to execute in the following format: Subroutine_group.Subroutine_name

4 - 58 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Execution from User Alarms

The following example shows how to use a user alarm event to execute a subroutine.
In this example, settings are made to execute the subroutine when the user alarm occurs.

1 Select the user alarm and display the events and actions.

4-5 Subroutines
4
2 Select Raised as the event.

4-5-1 Subroutine Execution

3 Select CallSubroutine as the action.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 59

4 Creating the HMI Application

4 Specify the subroutine to execute in the following format: Subroutine_group.Subroutine_name

4-5-2 Precautions on Internal Processing

 Handling of Variables
If the value of an external variable is changed in a subroutine, the change is immediately updated at
the connected device. Therefore, if you frequently change the value of an external variable inside a
subroutine, the performance of that subroutine will be reduced.

 Processing during Subroutine Execution

The touch panel and function keys will not respond during execution of a page subroutine. If you
execute processing that requires time, the HMI will not perform other operations until the processing
is completed. Consider the execution time when you create subroutines. However, processing will
continue for background operations, such as communications, and for page refreshing.

 Simultaneous Execution of Subroutines

It is possible that a subroutine for a global event and a page subroutine will be executed simultane-
ously. If both subroutines manipulate the same variable, implement exclusive control or other suit-
able measures.

Background Processing of Subroutines for Global Events

If you select the AsyncExecution Check Box, a subroutine process and a drawing update process
for that global event are asynchronously executed. Up to five subroutines can be executed simulta-
neously. If you attempt to execute more than that, the processes enter standby for execution. If the
number of subroutines waiting for execution exceeds 100, a warning dialog box appears on the
screen.
When you asynchronously execute subroutines, the execution timing is controlled by the OS. There-
fore, if you do not synchronize subroutines, you may get unexpected results.
Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking the timing of the execution of the oper-
ations of the programs.

4 - 60 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-5-3 Code Editor

Subroutines are edited with the Code Editor.

Starting the Code Editor

 Global Subroutines
Double-click a previously registered subroutine under HMI - Global Subroutines in the Multiview
Explorer. Or, right-click the subroutine and select Edit from the menu.

4-5 Subroutines
 Page Subroutines
Right-click a previously registered page name under HMI - Pages in the Multiview Explorer and
select View Code Editor from the menu.

Code Editor Features

4
The Code Editor provides functions equivalent to those of a standard text editor. It also provides func-
tions that are optimized for Visual Basic, such as keyword highlighting, entry assistance, and collapsing
Sub statements.

4-5-3 Code Editor

4-5-4 Differences in Language Specifications
Although subroutines are used in Visual Basic, some of the functions are restricted for HMIs. There are
also extensions that are provided for use with HMIs. Refer to the NA-series Subroutine Reference for
details.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 61

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-6 Search and Replace

You can search and replace strings in the data of an HMI project. The basic Sysmac Studio operations
for searching and replacing generally apply to HMIs. Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation
Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details.

Differences When an HMI Is Selected

The following differences apply when an HMI is selected.
• You can select only All for the Look at Box.

Precautions for Correct Use

You can use an action name as a search string, but you cannot replace it with another action
name.
Example: You can search for the objects that specify the Login action. However, you cannot
replace the Login action settings with the Logout action settings using the replacement func-
tion.

4 - 62 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-7 Font Replacement

Replaces the font settings set for objects in the device with the specified conditions.

Font Replacement Procedure

Use the following procedure to replace the fonts.

4-7 Font Replacement

From the main menu, select Replace Font under the Edit.

2 Select the replacement condition and click Execute.

3 Click Yes.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 63

4 Creating the HMI Application

Additional Information

In the case of a project in which a large number of objects are arranged, if this function is exe-
cuted immediately after opening the project or immediately after a large number of changes are
made, it may take a very long time for the function to be executed. Run after confirming from the
Task Manager that the CPU utilization rate of Sysmac Studio is low.

Copying the Font Settings

Copy the font settings for the language specified in the Source to the font settings for the language
specified in the Applied to.

(a)

(b) (d)

(c)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Replacement method Select the replacement method.
(b) Source Set the project language to be copied from.
(c) Target font Select the setting item of the font to be replaced.
(d) Applied to Select the project language to be replaced.

4 - 64 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Example: The result of performing font replacement under the conditions below is as follows.
Project languages: English (United States), German (Germany), French (France)
Source: English (United States)
Applied to: only German (Germany) selected
Target font: all selected

 Before execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 20 Bold

4-7 Font Replacement

German (Germany) Segoe UI 12 Normal

French (France) Segoe UI 12 Normal

 After execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View 4

English (United States) Tahoma 20 Bold

German (Germany) Tahoma 20 Bold

French (France) Segoe UI 12 Normal

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 65

4 Creating the HMI Application

Replacing the Font Family

Replace the font family with the specified font family.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Replacement method Select the replacement method.
(b) Applied to Select the project language to be replaced.
(c) Target font Use Search to specify the font family to be replaced, and Replace to
specify the font family to replace it with.

4 - 66 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Example: The result of performing font replacement under the conditions below is as follows.
Project languages: English (United States), German (Germany), French (France)
Applied to: only German (Germany) selected
Target font: selected. Search set to All and Replace set to Arial.

 Before execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 12 Normal

4-7 Font Replacement

German (Germany) Times New Roman 20 Bold

French (France) Courier New 8 Italic

 After execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 12 Normal 4
German (Germany) Arial 20 Bold

French (France) Courier New 8 Italic

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 67

4 Creating the HMI Application

Resetting the Font Settings to the Default Settings

Change the font settings set for all objects to the font settings set in the language settings.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Replacement method Select the replacement method.
(b) Applied to Select the project language to be replaced.
(c) Target font Select the setting item of the font to be replaced.

4 - 68 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Example: The result of performing font replacement under the conditions below is as follows.
Project languages: English (United States), German (Germany), French (France)
Applied to: select all languages
Target font: all selected

 Language settings

Project Languages Family Size Style

English (United States) Segoe UI 12 Normal
German (Germany) Arial 12 Normal

4-7 Font Replacement

French (France) Arial 12 Normal

 Before execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 12 Normal

German (Germany) Times New Roman 20 Bold

4
French (France) Courier New 8 Italic

 After execution

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Segoe UI 12 Normal

German (Germany) Arial 12 Normal

French (France) Arial 12 Normal

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 69

4 Creating the HMI Application

Scaling the Font Size to the Specified Magnification

Increase or decrease the font size set for all objects to the specified magnification.

(a)

(b) (d)

(c)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Replacement method Select the replacement method.
(b) Select screen sizes Specify the screen resolution to specify the magnification according to
the NA Series screen size.
(c) Set the magnification value according to the details specified in Select
screen sizes.
(d) Applied to Specify the project language and magnification to be replaced.

4 - 70 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Example: The result of performing font replacement under the conditions below is as follows.
Project languages: English (United States), German (Germany), French (France)
Applied to: select all languages, specify 60% magnification

 Before replacement

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 20 Normal

German (Germany) Times New Roman 18 Normal

4-7 Font Replacement

French (France) Courier New 22 Normal

 After replacement

Project Languages Family Size Style View

English (United States) Tahoma 12 Normal

German (Germany) Times New Roman 10 Normal 4

French (France) Courier New 13 Normal

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 71

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-8 IAG Replacement

IAG objects placed in a page in the currently selected device are replaced with other IAGs.

IAG Replace Dialog Box

In the IAG Replace dialog box, select the IAG to replace and execute replace.

(a) (f)

(b) (e)

(c) (d)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Search IAG Select the IAG to be replaced. All IAGs in the device are displayed.
(b) Contents of IAG to search The contents of the IAG currently selected at Search IAG are displayed.
(c) Replace Executes the replace.
(d) Cancel Closes the dialog box.
(e) Contents of IAG to replace The contents of the IAG currently selected at Replace IAG are displayed.
(f) Replace IAG Select the IAG after replacement. The displayed IAG is the same as the
one displayed in the Toolbox.

Targeted Objects
With IAG replacement, IAG objects in the currently selected device are targeted for replacement. In
addition, properties belonging to the IAG objects are replaced as follows.
• Properties of IAG objects
Values are transferred to the same properties. For this reason, when a property name that can be
changed by a user belonging to Behavior(Input), etc. is changed, values are not transferred. Config-
ure the settings again after the replacement is complete.
• Animations of IAG objects
The same animation is added to the IAG objects after replacement.
• Events and actions of IAG objects
When the same events exist in the IAG objects after replacement, the same events and actions are
added.
• Properties of objects in IAG objects
The default values of the IAG after replacement are set. Set the values again as required.

4 - 72 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

Procedure for Replacing IAGs

The following procedure describes an example of replacing IAG0 with IAG1.

1 Create a new IAG project, and create an IAG collection containing IAG0.

2 Create a new standard project, and display the IAG collection created in step 1 in the Toolbox.

3 Place IAG0 on the page.

4-8 IAG Replacement

4

4 Save and close the project.

5 Open the project created in step 1, add changes to IAG0, and rename it as IAG1. Then, create
the IAG collection.

6 Open the project created in step 2, and display the IAG collection created in step 5 in the Tool-
box.

7 From the main menu, select Edit - IAG Replace.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 73

4 Creating the HMI Application

8 From Search IAG, select IAG0 of the IAG to be replaced.

9 From Replace IAG, select IAG1 of the IAG after replacement.

10 Click Replace.
11 When the dialog box below disappears, this indicates that replacement is completed. In the IAG
Replace dialog box, click Cancel.
The IAG object that has been replaced is displayed in the Search and Replace Results Tab
Page. Use this page for confirmation, etc.

4 - 74 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-9 Device Replacement

Assignments such as the mapping information onto the devices of variables in the currently selected
device are replaced.

Device Replace Dialog Box

4-9 Device Replacement

In the Device Replace dialog box, select the device to replace and execute replace.

(a)

(b)

(d) (c) 4

Symbol Item Description

(a) Search Device Select the device to be replaced. All internal and external devices in the
current device are displayed.
(b) Replace Device Select the device after replacement. All internal and external devices in
the current device are displayed. When Create a new external device is
selected, a new external device is created, and device variables, etc. are
registered to that device.
(c) Cancel Closes the dialog box.
(d) Execute Executes the replace.

Targeted Objects
By device replacement, the following are replaced. Even in the case of disagreement, for example,
when multiple global variables are assigned to the same device variable in the device after replace-
ment, replacement is executed and this results in an error. When an error occurs, correct the settings
as appropriate.

The following are targeted for replacement.

• Data type and assignment destination of global variables
The name of user-defined type devices set to the data type of global variables and the names of
devices set to assignment destinations are replaced.
• User events
All user events registered to devices to be replaced are moved to devices specified at Replace
Device.
• Action
Device names included in the settings of the following actions are replaced:
• Controller Name of ShowTroubleshooter
• Look in of StartSafetyMonitor

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 75

4 Creating the HMI Application

• Subroutines
The following function arguments are replaced:
• RetrieveRange of StartSafetyMonitor(VariableName, RetrieveRange, RetrievePurpose)
• ControllerName of ShowTroubleshooter(ControllerName, StartPage)
• Troubleshooter
The following settings are replaced:
• Device of Launch on System Event and Launch on User Event
• Device of Language mapping

Procedure for Replacing Devices

The following procedure describes an example of replacing information assigned to new_Controller_0
by creating a new external device in a project containing the new_Controller_0 and the HMI of an inter-
nal device.

1 From the main menu, select Edit - Device Replace.

2 At Search Device, select new_Controller_0 and at Replace Device, select Create a new
external device, and click Execute.

4 - 76 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

3 When the dialog box below disappears, this indicates that replacement is completed. In the
Device Replace dialog box, click Cancel.
The location that has been replaced is displayed in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page.
Use this page for confirmation, etc.

4-9 Device Replacement

4

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 77

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-10 Cross References

4-10-1 Cross References

Cross references allow you to confirm in a list format where an element*1 that is part of a project is used
within the project.
On the list that shows the locations where an element is used, you can access the locations where the
element is used.
*1. You can cross-reference the following elements.
• Variables
• Data types
• Pages
• Resources
• Data groups
• Data sets
• Recipes
The basic operating procedures are the same as for the rest of the Sysmac Studio. Refer to the Sysmac
Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details.

Additional Information

When a variable in the properties of an object or a variable set in an expression is selected, the
corresponding row in the Cross Reference window is highlighted. Only Variable in the properties
and variables set in Expression in the properties are compatible with this function.
Note that even if the same variable set in other than the properties is selected while a row is
highlighted, the highlighted row on the Cross Reference window will remain the same as in the
previous selection.

Displaying and Manipulating Cross References

1 From the main menu, select View - Cross Reference Tab Page.
The Cross Reference Tab Page is displayed. You can check a list of the locations where the
selected element is used.

4 - 78 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-11 Building

4-11-1 Building
The project must be built to convert it into a form that the HMI can execute.
During the building process, subroutines and variables are checked.

If there are any errors, the build operation is not performed and is displayed next to the program or
variable where the error occurred in the Multiview Explorer.

4-11 Building
You can confirm the errors on the Build Tab Page.

Additional Information

In a project using Runtime Ver. 1.10 or later, detailed error checks of the expressions are made
during the building process and the results are displayed in the Build Tab Page. 4
The detailed error checks of the expressions are not displayed unless compilation is performed.
Therefore, these error checks will not be performed if errors remain that are checked in real

4-11-1 Building
time. Also, as compilation is run on a module-by-module basis and ends when an error is found,
all the errors may not be displayed with a single build. Repeat building and error correction until
no errors remain.
Note that expressions whose type is only fixed during execution will not cause an error during
building. For example, if a String type is assigned in a position where a Boolean type is required,
some values assigned to the String type variable can be cast to a Boolean type so that no error
occurs during building.
If a single build has 100 or more errors, some errors will not be displayed.
Some of error messages displayed here will be displayed in a language selected in Windows'
language settings.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 79

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-11-2 Build Operation

Use the main menu to execute the build operation. HMI projects are not built automatically even if no
operations are performed for 5 seconds.

Executing a Build Operation

1 Select Build HMI from the Project Menu.

Aborting a Build Operation

No functions can be executed while building the project is in progress. If necessary, you can abort build-
ing to check the project.

1 Select Abort Build from the Project Menu.

2 The build operation is aborted and a message that says it was aborted is displayed in the Out-
put Tab Page.

Additional Information

You can execute IncrementalBuild HMI to build only parts that were changed since the last
build. This shortens the build time, but dependency relations or other conditions may some-
times prevent the build from completing normally. In this case, repeat Build HMI.

4 - 80 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 4 Creating the HMI Application

4-12 Offline Comparison

HMI projects are not included in offline comparisons. Even if you perform an offline comparison for a
project that contains an HMI as a device, information on the HMI is not included in the comparison
results.

4-12 Offline Comparison

4

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 4 - 81

4 Creating the HMI Application

4-13 Resource Usage

The resource usage status in a device can be displayed.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(e) (d)

Symbol Item Description

(a) The number of variables Displays the number of variables set to be retained in the form of a graph.
in the internal retained
memory
(b) Memory that is occupied Displays the size of the memory used for variables set to be retained in
by variables in the internal the form of a graph.
retained memory
(c) Variable Displays the total number of global variables in the form of a graph. The
number of variables for each individual device can be checked by hover-
ing the mouse over the graph.
(d) Maximum number of user The value set at Internal Retained Memory Settings - Maximum Num-
alarm logs ber of User Alarm Logs at the device settings is displayed.
(e) User alarm log predicted When additional information is used by user alarms, the predicted num-
value ber of user alarms that can be saved to internal retained memory is dis-
played.

4 - 82 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Objects
This section describes the objects that are provided as standard features.

5-1 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-1-1 Object List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5
5-1-2 Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-1-3 Using Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-2 Examples of Using Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-2-1 Displaying a PDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-2-2 Displaying a User Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-2-3 Inserting a Variable Value in a User Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-2-4 Displaying a Trend Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-2-5 Displaying a Broken-line Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-2-6 Using a Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-2-7 Setting the Order of Automatic Move of Input Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-2-8 Displaying Text Strings by Indirect Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-2-9 Creating Buttons with the Lamp Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-2-10 Creating Buttons to Output Operation Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5-1

5 Objects

5-1 Objects
Basic objects are provided in the Sysmac Studio as standard features. You can use these objects to
easily create pages.

5-1-1 Object List

The following objects are provided.

Functional Objects
A functional object provides some sort of function by itself.

Classification Object name Description

Buttons *1 Button object Used to execute an action without writing a value to a variable.
Momentary Button Used to change the value of the specified variable to True only while
object the object is being touched.
Set Button object Used to change the value of the specified variable to True when the
object is touched.
Reset Button object Used to change the value of the specified variable to False when the
object is touched.
Toggle Button object Used to toggle the value of the specified variable between True and
False when the object is touched.
Lamps Bit Lamp object Lit while the result of the condition expression is True.
Data Lamp object Used to change the color of the lamp according to the value of a condi-
tion expression.

5-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

Classification Object name Description

Standard con- CheckBox object Used to change a variable to True or False depending on whether the
trols check box is selected. Also, the check box can be displayed when the
value of the specified variable changes.
Data Display object Used to display numeric values or text strings.
Data Edit object Used to display and enter numeric values or text strings.
DateTime object Used to display the value of a variable as a date and time.
DropDown object*2 Used to store the value that corresponds to the item selected in a
drop-down list in a variable. Also, the item that corresponds to the
specified variable value is displayed.
Image object Used to display an image. Refer to A-2 Supported Formats on page
A-5 for the supported formats.
Label object Used to display a fixed text string. Also, if you use DisplayValue for the
animation property, you can display the value of the variable.
ListBox object Used to store the value that corresponds to the item selected in a list in a
variable. Also, if the value of the specified variable is changed, you can
move the focus to an item that corresponds to the new value of the variable.
Radio Button object Used to set the specified variable to the value that was set for the

5-1 Objects
selected button. Only one of the specified group of buttons can be
selected. Also, the option button can be displayed when the value of
the specified variable changes.
Slider object Used to set the specified variable to the value that corresponds to the
position of the slider. Also, if the value of the specified variable is
changed, you can move the slider to the position that corresponds to 5
the new value.
Tab Control object Used to partially change pages within the screen. Several tab pages

5-1-1 Object List

are used to change the displayed contents by changing the tab page.
You can create a maximum of 64 tab pages for a Tab Control object,
and up to 10 Tab Control objects on a screen.
TextBox object Used to display a fixed text string. A TextBox object differs from a Label
object in that the object can be enabled or disabled in the properties.
Normally use Label objects that operate faster.
Gauges*3 Gauge Object There are several types of gauges provided, such as one with a needle
that rotates in a circle and one with a needle that moves in a straight line.
HMI controls Broken-line Graph Used to display broken-line graphs. There is no limit to the number of
object traces, but a maximum of 16 is recommended.*4
Media Player object Used to create an object that plays video. Refer to A-2 Supported For-
mats on page A-5 for the supported formats.
Recipe Viewer object Used to display the contents of a recipe.
Trend Graph object Used to display data from data logging as a graph. Up to 8 analog
traces and 16 digital traces are supported.*4*5
User Alarms Viewer Used to display a user alarm.
object
*1. You can change the object type with the Properties setting.
*2. The background color differs between Sysmac Studio and the NA Unit.
*3. The size of the font of the gauge object scale may vary between Windows 10 and other operating systems.
*4. The color Alpha is disregarded for these objects. For this reason, if a transparent color is set, it will be drawn
as a non-transparent color. A combined total of up to 8 Broken-line Graph objects and Trend Graph objects
can be placed in one project.
*5. A maximum of 25,000 points can be drawn in Trend Graph objects. Any part that exceeds 25,000 points will
not be drawn.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not switch input control while operating a slider object or the scroll bar of an object.
The object may not be operated from then onward.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5-3

5 Objects

Graphic Objects
A graphic object does not provide any specific function by itself. You must add functions by using
events and actions. Many different graphic objects are available. Some typical ones are described in
the following table.

Classification Object name Description

Shapes Curve object Used to draw a curved line. You can double-click the graphic object to
edit it.
Ellipse object Used to draw a circle or ellipse.
Line object Used to draw a straight line. You can double-click the graphic object to
edit it.
Polygon object Used to draw a polygon. You can double-click the graphic object to edit
it.
Polyline object Used to draw connected straight lines. You can double-click the
graphic object to edit it.
Rectangle object Used to draw a rectangle.
Triangle object Used to draw a triangle. You can double-click the graphic object to edit
it.

5-1-2 Object Attributes

There are the following three types of attributes for objects.
• Properties
• Animations
• Events and actions

Properties These are static attributes.

Objects
Animations These attributes control object animations when the specified
condition expressions are met.

Events and actions You can specify events and the actions to perform
when the events occur.

5-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

Properties
 Properties
Properties are the static attributes of an object.
These include settings for the names and other general properties, colors, positioning, and other
display properties, and assigned condition expressions or variables, as described in the following
table.

Properties

Properties Description
General You can set the name of the object and check the object type.
Appearance You can set the object color, shape, label, etc.
Behavior You can set condition expressions, variables, and delay times to assign to
the object.

5-1 Objects
Expression You can specify a condition expression that uses variables.
Variable You can specify a variable.
IsEnabled, DoubleTouch- You can make settings to enable the object, determine the double-touch
Time, OnDelayTime, etc. interval, set the ON-delay time, etc.
Layout You can set the position and size of the object.
Security You can set security for the object. 5
Pointer Marker You can set the needle marker for a gauge.
Ranges You can set the range for a gauge.

5-1-2 Object Attributes

Scale Bar You can set the scale bars for a gauge.
Tick Label You can set scale labels for a gauge.
Tick Major You can set the major scale division labels for a gauge.
Tick Minor You can set the minor scale division labels for a gauge.
Needle You can set the needle for a gauge.
Needle Cap You can set the needle cap for a gauge.
Data You can set the display target of a Trend Graph or Broken-line Graph.
Left Axis You can set the left axis for a graph.
Right Axis You can set the right axis for a graph.
Time Scale You can set the time axis for a graph.

Additional Information

• Encoding of data display objects is used when a numeric type array variable is assigned to
Expression. To designate character encoding of String type variables, use Communica-
tions Configuration - Encoding in Device References.
• To copy settings related to the font of objects to other languages in projects set with multiple
languages, open the font setting in Properties, and click Copy font settings. Settings related
to the font of the default language are copied to other languages.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5-5

5 Objects

 Notation for Expression

If you specify a BOOL variable, e.g., for a Lamp object, you can specify an expression for the
Behavior property.
Examples of the expression notations are given below.

Example 1: Executing a Function when a Boolean Variable (blnSample in this Example) Is True
blnSample=True

Example 2: Executing a Function when an Integer Variable (intSample in this Example) Is Less
Than 20
intSample<20

Example 3: Executing a Function when a Boolean Variable (blnSample in this Example) Is True and
an Integer Variable (intSample in this Example) Is Less Than 20.
(blnSample=True) AND (intSample<20)

Example 4: Setting a Value by Adding 100 to an Integer Variable (intSample in this Example)
intSample+100

 Notation for CustomDisplayFormat

If you set ValueFormat to Custom for a Data Display object, you must set the custom display format
(CustomDisplayFormat). The basic format is 0:*****, where ***** is replaced with the result of
Expression.
This format follows the specifications of custom numeric format strings in Visual Basic. For details,
refer to the Microsoft website or to commercially available reference materials.

Example 1: Display When Result of Expression is 1.234 and {0:00.0000} Is Specified

01.2340

Example 2: Display When Result of Expression is 1.234 and {0:##.####} Is Specified

1.234

Example 3: Display When Result of Expression is 1.234 and X={0:##.####} Is Specified

X=1.234

5-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

Animations
 Animations
You can use animations to change the status of the object according to Expression (condition
expression).
As described below, you can specify the status when the condition expression is met, such as flash-
ing, enabling/disabling operation, size/coordinate changes, and displaying/hiding the object.

Animation List

Animation name Description

Blink When the condition expression is met, the object flashes in the specified color.

ColorChange(Analog) Changes the color of the object according to a value.

ColorChange(Boolean) Changes the color of the object according to True/False status.

Displays a value based on a condition expression.

5-1 Objects
DisplayValue
Enable Enables operating the object when the condition expression is met.

Move Changes the coordinates of the object according to specified condition expres-
sions.
PercentageFill Fills a graphic figure based on a condition expression and a percentage
between the upper and lower limits.*1 5
ResizeHeight Changes the height of the object according to a specified condition expression.
Changes the width of the object according to a specified condition expression.

5-1-2 Object Attributes

ResizeWidth
Rotate Rotates a graphic object based on a condition expression.

Visibility Displays the object when a condition expression is met.

*1. Be sure to set the background color of objects to Solid Color. Operation when a background color other
than Solid Color is set is not guaranteed.

Events and Actions

 Events and Actions
You can make settings for object events and corresponding actions.
You can specify events and the actions to perform when the events occur.
You can specify the required conditions and operations, such as executing a specified subroutine
when a function key is touched.
The events and actions are listed in A-1 Events and Actions on page A-2.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5-7

5 Objects

5-1-3 Using Objects

The objects are provided in the Toolbox on the right side of the window.
You can create them on pages and set the properties and animations and also the events and actions.

Creating Objects
1 Drag the objects from the Toolbox and drop them on the page.

5-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

Additional Information

• You can drag and drop a variable registered in the controller's global variable table or a con-
tact or coil placed in the ladder editor onto the page editor to automatically register the con-
troller variable as an HMI-mapped global variable, and create an object corresponding to the
variable type.
• When pasting an array variable to such as an HMI property variable, brackets are automati-
cally converted to "()" which are used in HMI. Same conversion is performed when pasting in
the opposite way.

Setting Properties
1 Double-click the object.

Additional Information

5-1 Objects
You can also use the following methods to display the properties.
• Select Properties from the View Menu.
• Right-click the object and select Properties from menu.

5
2 The properties are the static attributes of the objects.

5-1-3 Using Objects

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5-9

5 Objects

Make the following settings as required.

Setting Animations
You can set animations by clicking the icon displayed for the property on which the animation acts. The
procedure shown here is for the example of Blink in a button object.
The animation icon has three states.

: Set. No error.

: Not set.

: Set. Error.

1 Double-click the button object to display the Properties Window.

2 Click for BorderColorButtonUp.

3 Set the expression and color, and click OK.

Additional Information

Click Delete to delete the animation settings.

Animations can also be set from the Animations Window.

5 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

Setting Events and Actions

1 Select Events and Actions from the View Menu.

5-1 Objects
5
2 You can set the actions for events in the Events and Actions Window.

5-1-3 Using Objects

Additional Information

The Events and Actions Window can also be displayed using in the Toolbar or Properties
Window.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 11

5 Objects

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

This section provides examples of using objects.

5-2-1 Displaying a PDF File

The following example shows how to display a PDF file full screen when a button is touched.

1 Place a button on the page.

2 Select Events and Actions from the View Menu.

3 Select Click from Events.

5 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

4 Select ShowDocument (FullScreen) from Actions.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

5
5 Set DocumentFileName to the name of the file to display.

5-2-1 Displaying a PDF File

Transfer the project to the HMI and confirm the operation.
The PDF file should be displayed when the button is touched.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 13

5 Objects

5-2-2 Displaying a User Alarm

The following example shows how to register a user alarm and display a message when the user alarm
occurs.
This example creates a user alarm that displays the message Alarm1 in a confirmation dialog box when
the blnAlarm1 variable changes to True.

1 Double-click Group0 under HMI − User Alarms in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Right-click in the user alarm table for the new group and select Add from the menu.

3 A row is added. Make the following settings in the new row. Use the default values for settings
that are not specified.
Name: UserAlarm1
Expression: blnAlarm1=True
Message: Alarm1
Popup: Selected
Acknowledge: Selected

Additional Information

If you set a page name for the Page parameter, the screen is switched to the specified page
when an alarm occurs. Select an alarm displayed on the User Alarms Viewer, and execute the
ShowAlarmPage action/function. The screen is changed to the specified page.

5 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

4 Double-click HMI - Pages - Page0 in the Multiview Explorer. Drag a User Alarms Viewer object
from HMI Controls in the Toolbox to the page.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

Additional Information

With Runtime Ver. 1.14 or later, the elapsed time since an alarm occurred can be displayed.
Select Elapsed Time in the property column. The elapsed time is displayed in units of minutes.
5
Transfer the project to the HMI and confirm the operation.
When the blnAlarm1 variable changes to True, the contents that was set for the User Alarms

5-2-2 Displaying a User Alarm

Viewer object are displayed in a confirmation dialog box.

Additional Information

You can sort the displayed items by touching a column of the User Alarms Viewer.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 15

5 Objects

5-2-3 Inserting a Variable Value in a User Alarm

The following example shows how to insert a specific variable value into the user alarm message at the
time the user alarm occurred. Refer to 5-2-2 Displaying a User Alarm on page 5-14 for the basic setting
procedure.

Additional Information

Additional information is retained together with the information of user alarms in internal
retained memory. For this reason, when additional information is set, the number of user alarms
that can actually be retained is less than the number set in HMI Settings - Maximum Number
of User Alarm Logs.
For a rough estimate of the number of user alarms that can be retained in internal retained
memory when additional information is used, check at Resource Usage.

1 Create the SerialNo variable to contain the serial number.

2 Set the user alarm as follows.

Add {%%} at the position in the user alarm message where you want to insert the variable.

5 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

3 With the user alarm created at Step 2 selected, display the Properties Window and set SerialNo
as the variable.

Transfer the project to the HMI and confirm the operation. After setting SerialNo to 12345, the

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

alarm message appears as follows when Alarm1 is generated.

5-2-3 Inserting a Variable Value in a User Alarm

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 17

5 Objects

5-2-4 Displaying a Trend Graph

The following example shows how to register a data set for data logging and display a trend graph that
accesses it.
This example records log data continuously every 5 seconds and saves it in a separate file for each
24-hour period.

1 Register an integer variable called intDatalog1 in the global variable table.

2 Right-click HMI - Data Logging in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Data Set from the
menu.

3 Double-click the new data set.

4 Right-click in the new data set grid and select Add from the menu.

5 A row is added. Set intDatalog1 in the Variable column of the new row. Use the default values
for other settings.

5 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

6 Double-click Page0 under HMI - Pages in the Multiview Explorer. Drag a Trend Graph object
from HMI Controls in the Toolbox to the page.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

7 Set the name of the data set that you created as the data set in the properties.

8 Click for Analog Traces to open the Analog trace Setting.

5-2-4 Displaying a Trend Graph

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 19

5 Objects

9 Click to add a trace and set the variable to display on the graph.

10 Click Close.
Insert an SD Memory Card into the HMI, transfer the project to the HMI, and confirm the opera-
tion.
Every 5 seconds, the value of intDatalog1 should be sampled and displayed on the graph.

5 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

5-2-5 Displaying a Broken-line Graph

The following example shows how to use a broken-line graph.

1 Register an integer array variable called intData(10) in the global variable table.

2 Right-click HMI - Data Groups in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Data Group from the
menu.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

3 Double-click the new data group.

5-2-5 Displaying a Broken-line Graph

4 Register a data series in the new DataGroup0.
Right-click in the grid and select Add from the menu.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 21

5 Objects

5 A row is added. Perform the following settings in the new row. Use the default values for all
other settings.

6 Set an array variable called intData in the added data series. Use the default values for all other
settings.

7 Go back to the Page Edit Pane. Double-click Page0 under HMI - Pages in the Multiview
Explorer. Drag a Broken-line Graph object to the page from HMI Controls in the Toolbox.

5 - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

8 Set the name of the data group that you created as the data group in the properties.

9 Click for Traces to open the Trace Setting.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

10 Click to add a trace and set the data series to display on the graph.

5-2-5 Displaying a Broken-line Graph

11 Click Close.
Transfer the project to the HMI, and confirm the operation.
The value of each element of intData(10) should be displayed on the broken-line graph.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 23

5 Objects

5-2-6 Using a Recipe

The following example shows how to use a recipe.

1 Register integer variables called intRecipe1 and intRecipe2 in the global variable table.

2 Right-click HMI - Recipes in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Recipe Template from the
menu.

3 Double-click the new recipe template.

4 Register ingredients in the recipe template for the new recipe, Recipe0.
Right-click in the grid and select Add from the menu.

Additional Information

A recipe template is a defined data structure for a recipe.

5 - 24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

5 A row is added. Make the following settings in the new row. Use the default values for other set-
tings.

Ingredient Name: Recipe1

Variable: intRecipe1
Default Value: 10
Min Value: 0
Max Value: 100

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

Set Recipe2 as follows:
Ingredient Name: Recipe2
Variable: intRecipe2
Default Value: 20
Min Value: 0
Max Value: 100

5
6 Right-click in the grid and select Show Recipes from the menu.

5-2-6 Using a Recipe

7 Right-click in the grid and select Add from the menu.

Additional Information

Recipes make settings in advance that are actually set according to the data structure.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 25

5 Objects

8 A row is added. Make the following settings in the new row. Use the default values for other set-
tings.

Recipe Name: RecipeSample1

Recipe1: 30
Recipe2: 40

Recipe Name: RecipeSample2

Recipe1: 50
Recipe2: 60

9 Create a button to transfer the recipe.

Right-click HMI - Pages- Page0 in the Multiview Explorer and select View Code Editor from the
menu.

10 Create the following subroutine.

5 - 26 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

11 Double-click HMI - Pages - Page0 in the Multiview Explorer. Drag a Recipe Viewer object from
HMI Controls in the Toolbox to the page.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

12 Then drag a Button object from Buttons in the Toolbox to the page and set the following event
and action.

5-2-6 Using a Recipe

Transfer the project to the HMI and confirm the operation.
When the button is touched, the values that are set for the specified recipe should be written to
the connected device.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 27

5 Objects

5-2-7 Setting the Order of Automatic Move of Input Focus

The following example shows how to consecutively enter numeric values in the multiple data input
objects placed on a page.

Additional Information

The order of automatic move of tab control objects is not supported. When the order of auto-
matic move is set to tab control objects, the setting is ignored, and the tab moves to the object
that should be moved next among the objects not placed on tab control.

1 Register an integer variable called intData1 in the global variable table.

2 Place a data input object on the page.

3 Set intData1 in Variable of the properties for the data input object.

5 - 28 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

4 Place the multiple data input objects on the page by copying and pasting one.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

5 Click the Data Input Order Setting Button on the Toolbar to switch to the mode for setting data
input order.

6 Click the data input objects in the order in which to move the input focus. 5

5-2-7 Setting the Order of Automatic Move of Input Focus

7 When you complete the settings, the following dialog box appears.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 29

5 Objects

8 Select the AutoNavigateKeypads Check Box under Behavior in the properties of the page.

Transfer the project to the HMI, and confirm the operation.

When you press a data input object, a keypad is displayed. After you complete an input, the
input focus is automatically moved from one data input object to the next.

5 - 30 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

5-2-8 Displaying Text Strings by Indirect Addressing

You can dynamically change text strings that are displayed on label objects or text box objects. The fol-
lowing example shows how to switch a text string displayed on an object by using a value specified in a
variable.

1 Register an integer variable called intData1 in the global variable table.

2 Register a new resource group in a Resources table.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

5

5-2-8 Displaying Text Strings by Indirect Addressing

3 Open the added Resources table, and register a text string to display on an object.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 31

5 Objects

4 Open the Page Editor and create a Label object.

5 Open the properties of the Label object, and click under Appearance - Text (Default) to
open the Text Setting.

6 Select Dynamic in Resource Link Type and set "Group0_String"& intData1 in Expression.

7 Click Close.

5 - 32 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

8 On the page, create the data input object that inputs values to intData1.
Transfer the project to the HMI and confirm the operation.
When the value in intData1 is 0, the Label object displays “ABC”.
When the intData1 value is changed to 1, the object displays “XYZ”.

Additional Information

In Expression, set the text string that is displayed for the Resource ID on the Resources table.

5-2-9 Creating Buttons with the Lamp Function

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

The following example shows how to create a Button that, when touched, allows the entire color to be
changed as Variable 1 changes between TRUE and FALSE, and the inside indicator color changes as
Variable 2 changes between TRUE and FALSE.

1 Register Boolean variables called blnSample1 and blnSample2 in the global variable table.

2 Place a Set Button object on the page.

5-2-9 Creating Buttons with the Lamp Function

3 Open the Properties Window for the Set Button object. Set blnSample1 in the Variable Box,
and select Touch (Button) + Feedback (Indicator) in the VisualFeedback Box.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 33

5 Objects

4 Set blnSample2 in the FeedbackExpression Box.

With the above settings, pressing the Set Button object changes blnSample1 to TRUE, which changes
the entire button color.
The inside indicator color is changed as blnSample2 changes between TRUE and FALSE.

Additional Information

The position, size, and color of the indicators can be changed as required.

5 - 34 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 5 Objects

5-2-10 Creating Buttons to Output Operation Log Files

The following example shows how to create buttons to output operation log files to a SD memory card.

1 Click Configuration and Setup - Operation Log Settings in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Select the Start Operation Log Check Box.

5-2 Examples of Using Objects

3 Place a button object on the page.

5-2-10 Creating Buttons to Output Operation Log Files

4 Select the Operation Log Check Box.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 5 - 35

5 Objects

5 Place a button object on the page.

6 Set the following event and action and click .

7 Create the following subroutine.

8 Transfer To HMI.
Operation logging starts when the HMI starts.
Tap the button to record logs created in 2 to start leaving records in the Operation Log.
Tap the button created in 4 to save the operation log from 13:30:00 on April 1 2020 to 7:00:00 on
April 10 2020 in the SD memory card under the file name Operationdata.csv. Refer to A-5 Spec-
ifications of Operation Log Files on page A-9 for the specifications of the files to be saved.

5 - 36 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Connecting to the HMI
This section describes how to go online with an HMI.

6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-2 Going Online with an HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2-1 Methods for Going Online with an HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2-3 Online Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6
6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2-5 Going Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 6-1

6 Connecting to the HMI

6-1 Introduction

Connecting to the HMI

You must go online with the HMI or connect to the Simulator to communicate with it from the Sysmac
Studio.
The Sysmac Studio supports the following online connections for different applications.

Online connection Connection made to Application

Online connection The actual HMI To perform debugging, startup, or normal maintenance, the
same project as in the actual HMI is opened on the Sysmac
Studio and then an online connection is made. An online con-
nection is made based on the Communications Setup in the
project.
Simulator connection HMI Simulator The Simulator is used to debug the program offline. The Com-
munications Setup in the project is not used.

Additional Information

Refer to 7-1-5 Offline Debugging with Only the HMI Simulator on page 7-9 for information on
connecting to the Simulator and debugging operations.

6-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 6 Connecting to the HMI

6-2 Going Online with an HMI

You can simultaneously go online with more than one HMI in a project from the Sysmac Studio. The
operations that are described in this section apply to the currently selected HMI. If there is more than
one HMI registered in the project, confirm the HMI to operate before connecting to it.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not reconnect the USB cable for at least 10 seconds after you disconnect it. After you con-
nect the USB cable, do not disconnect it until Windows detects the connection.
It may become impossible for Windows to detect when the cable is connected or disconnected,
which would effectively disable the USB port. If that occurs, restart the computer. Otherwise,
you will not be able to use the USB device until Windows recovers from the suspended status.

6-2 Going Online with an HMI

6-2-1 Methods for Going Online with an HMI
To go online with an HMI, there are three connection methods that can be used. These are described in
the following table.

Connection method Connection diagram Description

Direct connection via The USB port on the computer is
USB connected directly to the USB slave
port on the HMI. 6
This is the default connection con-
figuration.

6-2-1 Methods for Going Online with an HMI

Direct connection via The Ethernet port on the computer
Ethernet is connected directly to Ethernet
port 2 on the HMI.

Ethernet connection The Ethernet port on the computer

via hub is connected through the Ethernet
network to an Ethernet port on the
HMI.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 6-3

6 Connecting to the HMI

6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method

You must set the connection method, IP address to connect to, and other parameters for communica-
tions between the computer and HMI.

1 Select Communications Setup from the HMI Menu.

The Communications Setup Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the connection method for the connection configuration in the Connection Type Field.
For an Ethernet connection via a hub, enter the IP address of the HMI to which you need to con-
nect in the Remote IP Address Area. Select any required options and enter the communications
time-out time if required.
Note Refer to Communications Setup Dialog Box Settings on page 6-5 on the next page for information on
the settings.

3 Click the OK Button.

This concludes the settings.

6-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 6 Connecting to the HMI

 Communications Setup Dialog Box Settings

Item Description
Connection Type Select the connection port to use to go online.
The selected method is normally used to go online.
Remote IP Address If you specify an Ethernet hub connection, set the IP address of the HMI that you will
connect to. Also, you can click a test button to perform a communications test.
Test USB Connec- Click the test button to perform a USB communications test.
tions
Options Confirm serial ID when If you select this option, the names and serial IDs are
going online. compared between the project and the HMI when you
go online to make sure that a connection is made to the
intended HMI.
Communications You can set the response monitoring time for communications with the HMI.
time-out An error is displayed if a response is not received before this time expires.

6-2 Going Online with an HMI

*1. The time can be set to between 1 and 3,600 s.

6-2-3 Online Connection

Use the following procedure to place the Sysmac Studio online with the HMI.

1 Select Online from the HMI Menu. Or, click the Go Online Button ( ) in the Toolbar.
The following message is displayed the first time you go online. After you write the project
name, this message is not displayed.

6-2-3 Online Connection

Additional Information

The same message will be displayed the next time you connect if the HMI device name that is
set in the project is different from the HMI device name that is set in the HMI.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The Sysmac Studio goes online and the color of the bar under the Toolbar changes to yellow.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 6-5

6 Connecting to the HMI

6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method

Use the following procedure to go online if you selected the option to select the connection method
whenever you connect the computer with the HMI in the Communications Setup Dialog Box.

1 Select Online from the HMI Menu. Or, click the Go Online Button ( ) in the Toolbar.
The Communications Setup Dialog Box is displayed.

The IP address that is set in the Communications Setup Dialog Box is displayed below the
Ethernet connection via a hub Option.

2 Select the connection method and then click the OK Button.

The Sysmac Studio goes online.

6-2-5 Going Offline

Use the following procedure to go offline.

Select Offline from the HMI Menu. Or, click the Go Offline Button ( ) in the Toolbar.
The Sysmac Studio goes offline.

6-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 6 Connecting to the HMI

6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs

The serial ID is verified when going online if the option to do so was selected in the Communications
Setup Dialog Box. If the serial ID of the project on the Sysmac Studio is different from that of the HMI,
the following confirmation dialog box is displayed when you attempt to go online.

6-2 Going Online with an HMI

1 Click the Yes Button.
The serial ID of the project on the Sysmac Studio is rewritten to the same value as that of the
HMI.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If a USB connection is used, an Ethernet IP address of 192.168.255.xxx is used internally.
When using a USB connection, do not use an IP address of 192.168.255.xxx for the Ethernet 6
interface card in the computer.
• Socket ports 9600 and 2224 are used for Ethernet UDP/IP communications. When using

6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs

Ethernet UDP/IP communications, do not use these ports for any other application.
• When using a direct Ethernet connection and there is more than one Ethernet interface card
mounted in the computer, you must select the Ethernet interface card to use. Refer to the
Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for specific selection proce-
dures.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 6-7

6 Connecting to the HMI

6-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Debugging
This section describes offline debugging using the HMI Simulator.

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7-1-1 Watch Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-2 Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-3 Step Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-1-4 Simulator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-1-5 Offline Debugging with Only the HMI Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-1-6 Offline Debugging with the Controller Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7-1

7 Debugging

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

The operations you can use for debugging on the Sysmac Studio are listed below. The HMI Simulator is
used for offline debugging. You can use the HMI Simulator by itself, or you can connect it to the Control-
ler Simulator to debug the entire system.

Caution
Although the Simulator simulates the operation of the HMI, there are differences from the
HMI in operation and timing. After you debug operation with the Simulator, always check
operation on the actual Controller and HMI before you use them in the actual system. Acci-
dents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation. Refer to A-6 Dif-
ferences between the Physical HMI and Simulator on page A-12 for details on differences
in operation.
Although offline debugging simulates the integrated operation of the HMI and Controller,
there are differences in operation and timing in comparison with combining the actual HMI
and Controller. After you debug operation with the simulation, always check operation on
the actual Controller and HMI before you use them in the actual system. Accidents may
occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation. Refer to A-6 Differences
between the Physical HMI and Simulator on page A-12 for details on differences in opera-
tion.
To run the simulator, administrator rights are required.

The following three functions are provided for debugging during HMI simulations. These functions are
the same regardless of whether they are used in offline debugging.
• Watch Tab Page
• Breakpoints
• Step execution

Additional Information

The following functions are disabled while the HMI simulator is running.
Changes made while the simulator is running will not be applied until the simulator is turned off.
• Build
• Online and functions that require online (synchronization, etc.)
• Editing subroutines
• Editing devices
• Editing variables and data types

7-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 7 Debugging

7-1-1 Watch Tab Page

The basic Sysmac Studio operations of the Watch Tab Page apply to HMIs.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details.
However, the following differences exist for HMI projects.
• You can monitor the following variables on the Watch (Project) Tab Page.
Standard projects: Only global variables can be registered. You can continuously monitor any of
the global variables. Register the variable names as they are.
IAG projects: You cannot monitor variables in the IAG project.
• The Watch Tab Page functions only for the Simulator. Even if you are online with the physical HMI,
you cannot monitor the variables in the physical HMI.

7-1-2 Breakpoints
You can set breakpoints in the source code of a subroutine. You can use breakpoints to pause the exe-
cution of a subroutine at any desired point.

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

Setting and Clearing Breakpoints
 Setting Breakpoints
You can set breakpoints to pause execution of a simulation, e.g., to see the status after a subroutine
is executed.

 Procedure
To set a breakpoint, move the cursor to the line in the subroutine where you want to set the break-
point and select Set/Clear Breakpoint from the Simulation Menu.
7
If you repeat this operation, the breakpoint will be cleared.

7-1-1 Watch Tab Page

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7-3

7 Debugging

Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints

 Disabling a Breakpoint
If you do not need a breakpoint temporarily during debugging, you can disable the breakpoint but
still leave it in the program.

 Procedure for Disabling Breakpoints

To disable a breakpoint, move the cursor to the line of the subroutine that has the breakpoint that
you want to disable, and select Enable/Disable Breakpoint from the Simulation menu. If you per-
form the same steps for a breakpoint that is disabled, the breakpoint will be enabled.

Clearing All Breakpoints

You can clear all of the breakpoints at the same time.

Select Clear All Breakpoints from the Simulation Menu to clear all of the breakpoints.

7-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 7 Debugging

7-1-3 Step Execution

You can use step execution when subroutine execution is paused at a breakpoint to trace operation one
line of the source code at a time.

Step Execution
You can use step execution to execute the source code of a subroutine one line at a time.
If you select Step In and other commands from the Simulation Menu while paused at a breakpoint dur-
ing a simulation, you can control execution one line or one function at a time.

Step Execution
The Step Execution command executes one function at a time.

Select Step Execution from the Simulation Menu when subroutine execution is paused during step-in

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

execution.

7-1-3 Step Execution

Step-in Execution
Step-in execution performs step execution for the source code of a subroutine.
When you execute a program through the Simulator, select Simulation - Step In when the subroutine
is stopped at a breakpoint, paused, or stopped during step execution.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7-5

7 Debugging

Step-out Execution
Use the Step Out command to exit a subroutine during step-in execution.
Select Step Out from the Simulation Menu during step-in execution.

Continue
The Continue command executes the subroutine to the next breakpoint.

Select Continue from the Simulation Menu when subroutine execution is paused during step-in execu-
tion.

7-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 7 Debugging

Jump to Current Position

Use this command to jump to the breakpoint at which the program is currently paused in the code edi-
tor.

Select Jump to Current Position from the Simulation menu when subroutine execution is paused dur-
ing step-in execution.

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

7

7-1-3 Step Execution

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7-7

7 Debugging

7-1-4 Simulator Functions

You can use functions such as page changing in Simulator if the Runtime version is 1.08 or higher.
(a) (b) (c) (d)

Symbol Item Description

(a) You can select a page to be displayed in Simulator.

(b) You can output the currently displayed page to the clipboard.

(c) Language Selection You can select the project language to be displayed.
(d) Exit Simulator

7-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 7 Debugging

7-1-5 Offline Debugging with Only the HMI Simulator

Before you check the entire system, you can perform debugging with the HMI Simulator alone.

When you create a project and want to debug it, always check operation with only the HMI Simulator
first. The Sysmac Studio comes with a Simulator that simulates HMI functions.

Procedure
Use the following procedure to start the Sysmac Studio and perform debugging.

1 Start the Sysmac Studio and create a project.

2 Create the HMI application.

3 Select Build HMI from the Project Menu to build the project.

4 Select Start NA Simulation from the Simulation Menu.

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

The Simulator starts.

7-1-5 Offline Debugging with Only the HMI Simulator

Additional Information

If the project is not yet built, it is built automatically.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7-9

7 Debugging

5 To stop the simulation, click Stop NA Simulation from the Simulation Menu. The HMI Simulator
is ended.

7-1-6 Offline Debugging with the Controller Simulator

You can perform debugging with the HMI Simulator connected online to the Controller Simulator. This
allows you to debug the project while the Controller program is actually running.

After you complete checking operation with the HMI Simulator alone, check operation that includes the
Controller program. The Sysmac Studio enables integrated debugging of the Controller program and
the HMI application by connecting the Controller Simulator to the HMI Simulator.

Procedure
Use the following procedure to start the Sysmac Studio and perform debugging.

1 Start the Sysmac Studio and create a project.

2 Create the Controller program.

3 Create the HMI application.

4 Select Build HMI from the Project Menu to build the project.

5 Select Run with Controller Simulator from the Simulation Menu.

Additional Information

• If there is more than one Controller in the project, the window will be displayed for the Con-
troller that is currently connected. If you select a Controller for which variables are not
mapped, an error will occur and starting the Simulator will be canceled.
This procedure does not support offline debugging with the NX-series Safety Network Con-
troller.
• When the simulator is started under the Run with Controller Simulator setting,
E_COM_002 may occur. This is because the controller simulator is always operated with the
latest unit version, because of which it may differ from the definition of the system variables
of the set unit version. This problem can be avoided by changing the set unit version of the
controller to the latest version.

7 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 7 Debugging

The Controller Simulator is started and the HMI Simulator is displayed.

7-1 HMI Debugging Functions

Additional Information

If the project is not yet built, the entire project including the Controller is built automatically. If a
building error occurs for the Controller, a dialog box is displayed to notify you of the error.
Change the device to the relevant Controller, build the project, and check the error.

6 To stop the simulation, click Stop NA Simulation from the Simulation Menu. The Controller
Simulator and the HMI Simulator are stopped. 7

7-1-6 Offline Debugging with the Controller Simulator

Additional Information

You can also start online debugging when the Controller is selected in the project. Refer to the
Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 7 - 11

7 Debugging

7 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Synchronizing Projects
This section describes how to synchronize the projects between the HMI and the Sys-
mac Studio.

8-1 Synchronizing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-2 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2-1 Downloading While Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2-2 Downloading by Using the Download Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-2-3 Using Storage Media for Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-3 Uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-3-1 Uploading Projects Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
8-3-2 Uploading with the Upload Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-3-3 Uploading with Storage Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8-1

8 Synchronizing Projects

8-1 Synchronizing Projects

Synchronization is used to transfer the project from the Sysmac Studio to the HMI.

The basic Sysmac Studio operations for synchronization generally apply to HMIs. Refer to the Sysmac
Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details.
This section describes differences in synchronization when an HMI is selected.

WARNING
Sufficiently check the operation of any project that you create before you start actual system
operation.

Precautions for Safe Use

Unexpected operation may result if you set inappropriate network configuration settings. Even
if appropriate network configuration settings are set, confirm that the controlled system will not
be adversely affected before you transfer the data.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not perform any other operations on the Sysmac Studio while the Synchronization Window
is active. An error will occur and synchronization will fail.

8-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

Functional Differences When an HMI Is Selected

The following differences exist in synchronization when an HMI is selected.
• Detailed comparison is not supported.
• Algorithm checking is not supported. Therefore, there is no way to prevent mismatches in build dates
that result from rebuilding.
• If the project version specified in the project is different from the version of the project in the HMI, the
runtime files will always be transferred.
• The following synchronization options are provided.

When trans-
Option Default Description
fer is enabled
Transfer source code to Selected. Values written Select this check box to transfer the source code.
the NA device. to HMI
Relink internal devices in Selected. Values written If this check box is selected, global variables are
the project (valid for from HMI automatically mapped to the Controller that is regis-
Transfer From Device) tered in the project when the project is uploaded.
Clear the present values Selected. Values written If this check box is selected, the present values of
of variables with Retain to HMI Retain variables are cleared after the data is down-
attribute. loaded.
Clear alarm log data from Selected. Values written If this check box is selected, the alarm log in
memory to HMI non-volatile memory is cleared. If you have changed
the user alarm settings, you cannot clear the selec-

8-1 Synchronizing Projects

tion of this check box.
Clear Data log data from Selected. Values written If this check box is selected, the data log data in
memory to HMI non-volatile memory is cleared. If you have changed
the data logging settings, you cannot clear the
selection of this check box.
Clear the operation log Selected. Values written If this check box is selected, the operation log in
buffer memory. to HMI non-volatile memory is cleared. If you have changed
the operation logging settings, you cannot clear the
selection of this check box.
Apply default values to Selected. Values written Overwrite the default values of the NA unit project
the project. (Upload) from HMI with the default values of the currently open project 8
when the project is uploaded.
Forcibly transfer Runtime Not Values written Downloads the Runtime files forcibly.
files. (Downloading) selected. to HMI

• The following dialog box is displayed when you connect to the HMI if the version of the system pro-
gram in the HMI is older than the version of the system program in the Sysmac Studio. You must
update the system program before you can perform synchronization. Update the system program
according to the displayed instructions.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8-3

8 Synchronizing Projects

Additional Information

System program 1.0.0 is installed in the NA unit in the factory default state. The system pro-
gram will always be transferred when synchronization is performed in this state.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Projects that are downloaded with Sysmac Studio version 1.10 cannot be uploaded.
• Projects that are downloaded when the Transfer source code to the NA device Check Box is
not selected cannot be uploaded.
• If a project with a different system version from the HMI is downloaded, the values of Retain
variables, the user alarm log, and the data log buffer memory will be initialized.
• Changing the settings with the HMI may result in a discrepancy at the comparison result,
even if the settings are the same.
• When version 1.10 or earlier of IAG is used in a project with Runtime Ver. 1.11 or later, the
page in which IAG is used may be different. When using Runtime Ver. 1.11 or later, use ver-
sion 1.11 or later of IAG in order to eliminate the differences.
• When using the Safety Monitor, perform safety validation on the safety controller before exe-
cuting synchronization.
• For a project downloaded to the NA unit with Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.31 or earlier, differences
may occur if synchronization is performed using Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.40 or later. This is
caused by a difference in the internal data structure and thus there is no problem on the proj-
ect itself. To eliminate the differences, download with Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.40 or later.
• When a custom keypad is used, the language setting and custom keypad may become
inconsistent.
• If using Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.40 or earlier, VNC server is set to use, and a password is not
set, differences may occur if synchronization is performed using Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.41 or
later. This is caused by a difference in the internal data structure and thus there is no problem
on the project itself. To eliminate the differences, download with Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.41 or
later.
• For a project downloaded with Sysmac Studio (32-bit edition), differences may occur if syn-
chronization is performed using Sysmac Studio (64-bit edition). (Same goes with the oppo-
site case.) This is caused by a difference of the values lower than the significant digits of
internal data. This difference does not affect the project operation, since this is only a differ-
ence in the internal data structure.
• Differences may occur if a download is executed after a subroutine group is deleted from a
global subroutine, and synchronization is executed again without closing the project. When a
subroutine group has been deleted, first close the project before executing synchronization.

8-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

Differences in Comparison Results

The following differences apply to the comparison results.

 Verification Results Example

The verification results are displayed as shown in the following example.

Column Item
Source Project name on the Sysmac Studio
Source Modified Date The last time that the project was built on the Sysmac Studio
Target Modified Date The last time that the HMI project was built on the Sysmac Studio
Target HMI project name
Detailed Comparison This column is not used when an HMI is selected.

 Verification Units
The units for comparison that are shown in the Synchronization Window are listed in the following
table.

Detailed
Synchronization data name Level Qty Remarks
comparison
HMI name 1 1 None
Project 2 1 None

8-1 Synchronizing Projects

Pages 3 1 None
Page* 4 N None
Subroutines 3 1 None
SubroutineGroup* 4 N None
Variables 3 1 None
Global Events 3 1 None
Alarms 3 1 None
Data Groups 3 1 None
Data logging 3 1 None
Recipe Template 3 1 None
Project Security 3 1 None
8
Troubleshooter 3 1 None
Languages 3 1 None
* 4 N None
Operation Log Settings 3 1 None
Settings 2 1 None
HMI Settings 3 1 None
User Data 2 1 None
User Accounts 3 1 None
Recipe Instances 3 N None
Resource Files 2 1 None
Documents 3 1 None
*.* 4 N None
Images 3 1 None
Videos 3 1 None
*.* 4 N None
Safety Data 2 1 None
* 3 N None

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8-5

8 Synchronizing Projects

8-2 Downloading
To execute a project that you created in the HMI, you must use synchronization to download the proj-
ect. This section describes how to download the project.

8-2-1 Downloading While Online

You can use the following procedure to download the project while the Sysmac Studio is online.

1 Place the Sysmac Studio online with the HMI. Refer to Section 6 Connecting to the HMI for
details.

2 Click on the Toolbar. Or, select Synchronization − NA Device from the HMI Menu.

3 The project on the Sysmac Studio is compared with the project in the HMI and the Synchroniza-
tion Window is displayed.

4 Select the items to download and select the options as required.

Click the Transfer to Device Button. The data is downloaded and the HMI is restarted.

8-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

Precautions for Correct Use

If you download a project simultaneously with PUT processing of a file from a client device
using the FTP server, the FTP-transferred file may be lost or downloading may fail.

8-2-2 Downloading by Using the Download Function

The download function is a specialized downloading function that makes downloading easier.

1 Click on the Toolbar. Or, select HMI - Transfer - Transfer To Device.

2 Select the options as required and click Execute.

8-2 Downloading
3 The following confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes.

8-2-2 Downloading by Using the Download Function

Additional Information

The download function differs from online downloading in the following ways:
• Cannot be run when online.
• System program updates are automatically executed, followed by execution of the project
download.
• The Synchronization Window is not displayed.
• When a device name is not set to HMI, the device name set in the project is unconditionally
set.
• Although the following options are forcibly executed in accordance with conditions, they are
not reflected in the check boxes of the dialog box.
• Clear the present values of variables with Retain attribute
• Clear alarm log data from memory
• Clear data log data from memory
• Clear the operation log buffer memory

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8-7

8 Synchronizing Projects

8-2-3 Using Storage Media for Downloading

With an HMI, you can perform product downloads with storage media.

1 Insert an SD Memory Card or USB memory device to use for the download into the computer.

2 Select Synchronization − Media Device from the HMI Menu.

3 Select the file to use for the download and click the OK Button.

8-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

4 The project on the Sysmac Studio is compared with the project in the storage media and the
Synchronization Window is displayed.

5 Click the Transfer to Media Device Button to transfer the project to the storage media.

6 Insert the storage media into the HMI, display the Device System Menu, and touch the Transfer

8-2 Downloading
Operations Button.

8-2-3 Using Storage Media for Downloading

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8-9

8 Synchronizing Projects

7 Touch the Transfer User Program To HMI Button.

8 Select the project to transfer and touch the Transfer to HMI Button to download the selected
project to the HMI.

8 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

8-3 Uploading
To edit the project in an HMI on the Sysmac Studio, you must use synchronization to upload the project.
This section describes how to upload the project.

8-3-1 Uploading Projects Online

You can use the following procedure to upload a project while the Sysmac Studio is online.

1 Place the Sysmac Studio online with the HMI. Refer to Section 6 Connecting to the HMI for
details.

2 Click the (Synchronize) Button on the Toolbar. Or, select Synchronization − NA Device
from the HMI Menu.

3 The project on the Sysmac Studio is compared with the project in the HMI and the Synchroniza-
tion Window is displayed.

8-3 Uploading
8

4 Select the items to upload and select the options as required.

8-3-1 Uploading Projects Online

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8 - 11

8 Synchronizing Projects

Precautions for Correct Use

When a project is uploaded, the internal devices are not linked. In this condition, you will not be
able to perform offline debugging with the Controller Simulator, or variable mapping.
Refer to 8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices on page 8-18 for information on how to relink internal
devices.

5 Click the Transfer From Device Button. The following confirmation message for overwriting is
displayed. Click the Yes Button.

The project is uploaded and the changes are applied to the open project.

8 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

8-3-2 Uploading with the Upload Function

The upload function is a specialized uploading function that makes uploading easier.

1 Click on the Toolbar. Or, select Transfer − Transfer From Device from the HMI Menu.

2 Select the options and click Execute.

3 The following confirmation message for overwriting is displayed. Click the Yes Button.

8-3 Uploading
Additional Information

The upload function differs from online uploading in the following ways:
• Cannot be run when online. 8
• System program updating is not run.
• Building is not performed before the upload.

8-3-2 Uploading with the Upload Function

• Uploading is run even if errors remain.
• The Synchronization Window is not displayed. Therefore, the upload always applies to all
upload items.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8 - 13

8 Synchronizing Projects

8-3-3 Uploading with Storage Media

With an HMI, you can perform project synchronization with storage media.

1 Insert the SD Memory Card or USB memory device to use for the upload into the computer.

2 Display the Device System Menu and touch the Transfer Operations Button.

3 Touch the Transfer User Program From HMI Button.

8 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

4 Specify the destination media and file name and touch the Transfer From HMI Button. The proj-
ect is uploaded to the specified media.

5 Insert an SD Memory Card or USB memory device into the computer and select Synchroniza-
tion - Media Device from the HMI Menu.

8-3 Uploading
8
6 Specify the file name on the media specified for the upload and click the OK Button.

8-3-3 Uploading with Storage Media

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8 - 15

8 Synchronizing Projects

7 The project on the Sysmac Studio is compared with the project in the storage media and the
Synchronization Window is displayed.

Precautions for Correct Use

When a project is uploaded, the internal devices are not linked. In this condition, you will not be
able to perform offline debugging with the Controller Simulator or variable mapping.
Refer to 8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices on page 8-18 for information on how to relink internal
devices

8 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

8 Click the Transfer From Media Device Button. The following confirmation message for over-
writing is displayed. Click the Yes Button.

The project is uploaded and the changes are applied to the open project.

8-3 Uploading
8

8-3-3 Uploading with Storage Media

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8 - 17

8 Synchronizing Projects

8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices

When a project is uploaded, the internal devices will not be linked and there will be restrictions on oper-
ations related to the Controller, such as variable mapping. This section describes how to relink a Con-
troller in the project.

Relinking while Uploading

If you select the Relinking to Internal Devices Check Box and upload the project, the internal devices in
the project that was uploaded are automatically relinked to the Controller of the same name. If there is
no Controller of the same name in the project, the Controller is registered as an unlinked Controller.
During relinking, the variables that are registered in the Controller in the project are compared with the
variables that are not registered in the Controller in the project. If no errors are detected, relinking is
completed.

Relinking after Uploading

If you do not select the Relinking to Internal Devices Check Box and upload the project, the internal
devices in the project that was uploaded will not be linked to the Controller’s project.

Use the following procedure to link the unlinked Controller with the Controller in the project.

1 Place the Sysmac Studio offline from the HMI. Refer to Section 6 Connecting to the HMI for
details.

8 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 8 Synchronizing Projects

2 Open Device References under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer and dou-
ble-click the unlinked Controller.

3 Select the Controller to link in the Internal Devices Area and click the Link to Internal Device
Button.

8-3 Uploading
8
4 The variables that are registered to the specified Controller are compared with the variables that
are registered to the unlinked Controller. If no errors are detected, relinking is completed.

8-3-4 Relinking Internal Devices

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 8 - 19

8 Synchronizing Projects

Additional Information

If any variables that are registered to the destination Controller do not agree with the variables
that are registered to the unlinked Controller when relinking is executed, the following dialog
box is displayed.
Modify the global variables in the Controller and in the HMI according to the information pro-
vided in the dialog box.

(a)

(c) (b)

Letter Item Description Remarks

(a) Conflict list Lists all of the conflicts.
(b) Cancel Cancels relinking.
(c) Continue Leaves the conflicts and completes relinking.

8 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

]

Reusing Objects
This section describes how to reuse objects.

9-1 Reusing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9-2 IAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2-2 Creating an IAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9-2-3 Using IAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-3 Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-3-1 Objects That You Can Register as Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-3-2 Creating Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-3-3 Deleting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9-3-4 Using Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9-1

9 Reusing Objects

9-1 Reusing Objects

The Sysmac Studio provides the following two functions to simplify and increase the speed of the devel-
opment of HMI applications.
• Intelligent application gadgets (IAGs)
• Custom objects

IAGs and custom objects are different in the following ways.

• You can distribute IAGs to other parties. You can use custom objects only on the Sysmac Studio.
• You must treat IAGs as IAGs even after you place them on pages. You treat custom objects like any
other objects after you place them on pages.
• After you place an IAG on a page, you can change only the properties of the IAG objects. You can
change any of the attributes of custom objects.
• You can hide the contents of subroutines in IAGs. Therefore, you can provide IAGs to other parties
without disclosing technology.

You can customize objects yourself and create reusable objects that combine other objects.

9-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

9-2 IAGs
An IAG is a library object that you can distribute to other parties. To create a new IAG, you must create
it in an IAG project. This section describes the procedures to create and use IAGs.

9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected

Even when an IAG project is selected, basic operations are generally the same as for a standard proj-
ect. However, the following items are different.

Items in the Multiview Explorer

The structure of the Multiview Explorer when you select an IAG project is shown below. You can edit the
user-defined variables, subroutines, and other resources in an IAG from the menu that is displayed
when you right-click the IAG.

9-2 IAGs
Configurations and Setup HMI 9
Language Settings IAGs
IAG Collection Settings Data 9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected

Resources

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9-3

9 Reusing Objects

Toolbar
This section describes the differences in the Toolbar compared with a standard project.

 Insert Menu

Item Description Remarks

IAG Inserts a new IAG in IAGs.

 Project Menu

Item Description Remarks

Build IAGs Builds all of the IAGs.
Publish IAG Collection Saves an IAG collection in a file format that you can use in a standard project.

Language Settings
You can set the languages to use in the IAG.

(e)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Symbol Item Description

(a) Adds a language to the language list.

(b) Deletes the selected language from the language list.

(c) Moves the selected language one position up in the language list.

(d) Moves the selected language one position down in the language list.

9-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

Symbol Item Description

(e) Language List Displays a list of the languages. The language at the top of the list is
treated as the default language.
Project Languages Sets the project language.
FontFamily *1 Sets the font that is set by default when an object is created.
FontSize *1 Sets the font size that is set by default when an object is created.
FontStyle *1 Sets the font style that is set by default when an object is created.

*1. Only appears when the Runtime version is 1.11 or higher.

IAG Collection Settings

You can make the following settings for an IAG collection.

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Symbol Item Description Remarks

(a) Name Sets the name.
(b) Version Sets the version.
(c) Description Sets a description.
(d) Publisher Sets the publisher.
Select this check box to display the IAG collection

9-2 IAGs
(e) Visible By Default in the Toolbox when the IAG collection is imported
into the Sysmac Studio.

9
9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9-5

9 Reusing Objects

IAGs
The following tab page is used to create an IAG. The procedures are generally the same as for standard
projects, except for the following differences.
• There are no global variables. Only the user variables for each IAG can be used.
• You cannot set page animations.
• You cannot use functions that cannot be placed on a page, such as global events and recipes.
• You cannot use Trend Graph or Broken-line Graph objects and user-created IAGs.

Additional Information

You cannot use names that are reserved by the system for user event names.

9-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

User Variables
For IAG, only the variables for each IAG can be used. The variables that are defined for each IAG are
called user variables.
You can create user variables that are internal variables and user variables that are In/Out variables.

 Editing User Variables

To edit user variables, right-click IAG and select View User Variables from the menu.

 Internal Variables
The internal variables are used only within the IAG. The internal variables are displayed in the user
variable table, but you cannot access them when you use the IAG.

9-2 IAGs
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

9
9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected

Letter Item Description Remarks

a Internals or In/Out Changes the display between internal variables
and In/Out variables.
b Name Sets the variable name.
c Data Type Sets the data type.
d Initial Value Sets the initial value.
e Comment Sets a comment.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9-7

9 Reusing Objects

 In/Out Variables
In/Out variables are exposed externally. You can access the In/Out variables when you use the IAG.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Letter Item Description Remarks

a Internals or In/Out Changes the display between internal variables
and In/Out variables.
b Name Sets the variable name.
c Data Type Sets the data type.*1
d In/Out If you set an In/Out variable, you can read and
write the variable when you use the IAG.
If you set an input variable, you can only write
the variable when you use the IAG.
e Initial Value Sets the initial value.
f Comment Sets a comment.
*1. Enumeration type is not supported.

Data Types
You can set the data types to use in the IAG. The procedures are the same as for a standard project.

9-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

Resources
You can set the resources to use in the IAG. The procedures are the same as for a standard project.

9-2 IAGs
9
9-2-1 Differences when an IAG Project Is Selected

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9-9

9 Reusing Objects

9-2-2 Creating an IAG

This section describes how to create an IAG.
The size of the IAG will be the size of the page when the IAG is created. Any objects that are positioned
outside of the page are ignored.

1 Create a new project and set the project type to IAG Project.

Select IAG Project.

2 Click the Create Button.

An IAG project is created and the following window is displayed.

3 Right-click the IAG, select View User Variables from the menu, and then register the required
user variables.

9 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

4 Create the IAG with the same methods as for a normal page.

5 Select Build IAGs from the Project Menu.

6 Select Publish IAG Collection from the Project Menu.

7 Click the Browse Button (...) and specify where to save the collection.

9-2 IAGs
9
9-2-2 Creating an IAG

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9 - 11

9 Reusing Objects

8 Click the Publish Button. The IAG collection is created.

9 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

9-2-3 Using IAGs

This section describes how to use the IAGs that you create when you edit a standard project.
To use IAGs, you must first register them in the Toolbox. After you register them in the Toolbox, you can
drag them to the page to use them in the same way as for other objects.

Registering IAGs
1 Select IAG Collections Manager from the Project Menu.

2 Click the + Button. Select the IAG file and click the Open Button.

9-2 IAGs
9
9-2-3 Using IAGs

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9 - 13

9 Reusing Objects

3 Select the Show in Toolbox Check Boxes for the IAG collections that you want to display in the
Toolbox.

4 The IAGs for the selected check boxes are displayed in the Toolbox.

9 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

5 Drag the IAG to the page.

6 Double-click the IAG and set the properties.

Set global variables or constants for the variables that are set as In/Out variables.

9-2 IAGs
9
9-2-3 Using IAGs

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9 - 15

9 Reusing Objects

9-3 Custom Objects

You can register the objects that you use most frequently to increase your productivity. This section
describes the procedures to create and use custom objects.

9-3-1 Objects That You Can Register as Custom Objects

An object must meet the following conditions before you can register it as a custom object.

• You can register only individual objects.

You cannot register more than one object as a custom object. If you want to register more than one
object as a custom object, group the objects into one object first.
• The object cannot be a user-defined IAG.
You cannot register a user-defined IAG or a group that contains a user-defined IAG as a custom
object.

9-3-2 Creating Custom Objects

Use the following procedure to create a custom object.

1 Create a standard project and place the objects to register as a custom object on the page.

9 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

2 Group the objects to register the group as a custom object.

3 Right-click the group of objects and select Add to Toolbox from the menu.

9-3 Custom Objects

9
9-3-2 Creating Custom Objects

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9 - 17

9 Reusing Objects

4 The group is added as a custom object under Custom in the Toolbox. The displayed name is
the name of the registered group or object.

9 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 9 Reusing Objects

9-3-3 Deleting Custom Objects

Use the following procedure to delete a registered custom object.

1 Right-click the custom object to delete from the Toolbox. Select Delete from the menu.

9-3 Custom Objects

2 A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the Yes Button.

9
9-3-3 Deleting Custom Objects

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 9 - 19

9 Reusing Objects

9-3-4 Using Custom Objects

It is very easy to use a custom object. Just select the desired custom object in the Toolbox and drag it to
the page. You can handle the custom objects on pages in the same ways as you handle normal objects.

9 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 10

Connecting to HMIs from External

Devices
This section describes how to connect to an HMI from an external device.

10-1 Accessing an HMI from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10-1-1 VNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-1-2 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 10 - 1

 10 Connecting to HMIs from External Devices

10-1 Accessing an HMI from an External

Device
You can use the following two methods to access an NA-series Programmable Terminal from an exter-
nal device.
• Remote monitoring and control with VNC
• File operations with FTP

Precautions for Correct Use

• Only password security is provided for using VNC and FTP. Sufficiently consider the network
configuration in terms of security and implement any required measures to prevent unauthor-
ized access.
• Use the same keyboard layout settings for the VNC client computer and the HMI. If the set-
tings are not the same, different characters may results from the characters input from the
VNC client.

10-1-1 VNC
You can enable VNC to use a VNC client to monitor and control HMI pages. You can also use a mode
setting to prohibit controlling operation from a VNC client and allow only monitoring.

Setting Method
Double-click HMI Settings under Configurations and Setup. Click the VNC Settings Button.

Select the Use Option for Enable VNC and change the setting of the Mode Box as required. Set a text
string in the Password Box.

10 - 2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 10 Connecting to HMIs from External Devices

10-1 Accessing an HMI from an

After you complete the settings, select Build HMI from the Project Menu. When building the project is
completed, download the project to the HMI.

External Device
After the download is completed, you can access the HMI from a VNC client.

Additional Information

Refer to the relevant software manuals for the operating procedures of the VNC client.

10
10-1-2 FTP

10-1-2 FTP
You can enable the FTP server to use an FTP client to access files in the HMI. However, you can
access only specific folder.

Setting Method
Double-click HMI Settings under Configurations and Setup. Click the FTP Settings Button.

Select the Use Option. Set text strings for the login name and password.
After you complete the settings, select Build HMI from the Project Menu. When building the project is
completed, download the project to the HMI.

After the download is completed, you can access the HMI from an FTP client.

Additional Information

Refer to the relevant software manuals for the operating procedures of the FTP client.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 10 - 3

 10 Connecting to HMIs from External Devices

10 - 4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11
Other Functions
This section describes other functions that the Sysmac Studio provides for HMIs.

11-1 Sysmac Studio Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11-2 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11-2-1 Printable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
11-3 Image File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11-4 Import/Export User Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11-4-1 Importing User Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
11-4-2 Exporting User Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
11-4-3 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11-5 Import/Export Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11-5-1 Importing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
11-5-2 Exporting Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
11-5-3 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
11-6 Import/Export Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11-6-1 Importing Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20
11-6-2 Exporting Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
11-6-3 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-22
11-7 Importing/Exporting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
11-7-1 Importing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-24
11-7-2 Exporting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-25

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 1

 11 Other Functions

11-1 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

The following Sysmac Studio option settings are related to HMIs.
• HMI
• HMI Code Editor
• HMI Page Editor

HMI
In HMI, you can configure settings for all operation of the HMI.

(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)

Symbol Item Description Remarks

(a) Resource Select the priority if the same resource
exists when copying and pasting.
Character String Priority: If the charac-
ter string is the same, you can change
the resource ID before pasting.
Resource ID Priority: If the same
resource ID exists, pasting overwrites
the resource.

When the check box in [Always over-

write existing resources] is selected, if
the resource ID is the same, the existing
resource is overwritten when the text is
changed in the object properties.
(b) Mapping Select Auto to automatically map a
variable when added in an internal
device.
This setting is only valid for an internal
device.

11 - 2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-1 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

Symbol Item Description Remarks
(c) The name of variable when the Set whether or not the device name is
variable was generated added to the name of a device vari-
able when variables are mapped
automatically.
This setting is only valid when there is
only one controller in the project.
(d) Reset to default settings You can reset the settings to the
default settings.

Additional Information

• Even when variable mapping is set to auto, variable mapping will not be executed when the 11
following functions are executed.
• Uploading by Going Online with an HMI
• Uploading Using HMI Media
• Importing an HMI Device
• When variable mapping is set to auto, variable mapping is executed when the device is
changed, so changing takes longer.

HMI Code Editor

You can make settings to highlight text in the HMI Code Editor.

(a)

(b)

Symbol Item Description Remarks

(a) Color Selections Select the color for each item.
(b) Reset to default settings This button resets the colors to the
default settings.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 3

 11 Other Functions

HMI Page Editor

You can make settings for the HMI Page Editor.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Symbol Item Description Remarks

(a) Grid Settings Make the settings for the grid.
(b) Multiview Explorer Settings Make the settings for Multiview
Explorer.
(c) Reset to Defaults This button restores the default set-
tings.

11 - 4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-2 Printing
This section describes the printing feature.

11-2 Printing
11-2-1 Printable Items
The following items can be printed. You can select the items to print.

Category of project
Items
Standard IAG 11
Device References 
Variable Mapping 

11-2-1 Printable Items

Pages 
Page Subroutines 
User Alarms 
HMI Settings 
Controller Events 
Data Logging 
Security Settings 
Troubleshooter 
Language Settings  
Recipes 
Data  
Global Events 
Global Subroutines 
Resources  
IAG Collection Settings 
IAGs 

Additional Information

For printing features that are unique to devices other than the HMI, refer to the relevant manu-
als.
For details on the settings and the procedure for printing, refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1
Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504).

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 5

 11 Other Functions

11-3 Image File Output

This section explains the image file output function.
You can output any page in a project as an image file. Supported file types are BMP, JPEG, and PNG.

11 - 6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-4 Import/Export User Alarm

11-4 Import/Export User Alarm

This section describes importing and exporting of user alarms.

11-4-1 Importing User Alarms

You can either import all user alarms at once, or import only a specific group of user alarms.
When the same user alarms already exist, they are overwritten. Event and Action settings retain the
state they had before importing.
11
Importing All User Alarms at Once

11-4-1 Importing User Alarms

1 Right-click User Alarms. Select Import from the menu.

2 Select the file and click Open.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 7

 11 Other Functions

Importing a Specific Group

1 Open the group you want to import.

2 Click .

3 Select the file and click Open.

11 - 8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-4-2 Exporting User Alarms

11-4 Import/Export User Alarm

You can either export all user alarms at once, or export only a specific group of user alarms.
Event and Action settings are not exported.

Exporting All User Alarms at Once

1 Right-click User Alarms. Select Export from the menu.

11

11-4-2 Exporting User Alarms

2 Set a file name and click Save.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 9

11 Other Functions

Exporting a Specific Group

1 Open the group you want to export.

2 Click .

3 Set a file name and click Save.

11 - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-4-3 File Format

11-4 Import/Export User Alarm

An Excel workbook is used to import or export user alarms.
The workbook contains the following sheets. Do not change the sheet name.

Sheet name Editing Description

UserAlarm Yes Set the user alarm description.
AlarmStrings Yes Set the alarm strings used in the UserAlarm sheet.
Information No Used by the system. Do not edit.

UserAlarm sheet 11
Set the user alarm information in the UserAlarm sheet. The first line is a header, and the 2nd and fol-
lowing lines contain the user alarm information. Do not edit the header line.

11-4-3 File Format

Line Setting Item Description
A Group Name 1 1st group name.
B Group Name 2 2nd group name.
C Group Name 3 3rd group name.
D Alarm ID ID.
E Alarm Code Alarm code.
F Expression Expression.
G Priority Order of priority. The levels indicated in Sysmac Studio correspond to the
levels indicated on the sheet as follows.
Sysmac Studio Sheet
User Alarm Level 1 UserFaultLevel1
User Alarm Level 2 UserFaultLevel2
User Alarm Level 3 UserFaultLevel3
User Alarm Level 4 UserFaultLevel4
User Alarm Level 5 UserFaultLevel5
User Alarm Level 6 UserFaultLevel6
User Alarm Level 7 UserFaultLevel7
User Alarm Level 8 UserFaultLevel8
User Information UserInformation

H Message Message. Set the resource ID of the set alarm string in the message.
I Popup Popup. The levels indicated in Sysmac Studio correspond to the status
indicated on the sheet as follows.
Sysmac Studio Sheet
Selected True
Not selected False

J Acknowledge Check. The levels indicated in Sysmac Studio correspond to the status
indicated on the sheet as follows.
If anything other than False is set in the popup, this setting will be disre-
garded and always treated as if True were set.
Sysmac Studio Sheet
Selected True
Not selected False

K Page Page.
L Details Details. Set the resource ID of the alarm string set in Details.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 11

11 Other Functions

Line Setting Item Description

M*1 DataType Data type of user alarm properties. The levels indicated in Sysmac Studio
correspond to the levels indicated on the sheet as follows.

Sysmac Studio Sheet

Boolean Boolean
Numeric Numeric
Text Text

N*1 Variable User alarm property variable.

O*1 ValueFormat Property storage format of user alarm. The levels indicated in Sysmac Stu-
dio correspond to the levels indicated on the sheet as follows.

Sysmac Studio Sheet

Decimal Decimal
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal

P*1 IntegerLength MinimumIntegerLength of the user alarm property.

Q*1 DecimalLength DecimalLength of the user alarm property.
R*1 ShowSeparator ShowSeparator of the user alarm property.

Sysmac Studio Sheet

Selected True
Not selected False

S*1 TextLength TextLength of the user alarm property.

*1. Only appears in Runtime version 1.15 or later.

AlarmsStrings sheet
In the AlarmStrings sheet, enter the alarm strings used in the UserAlarm sheet. The first line is a
header, and the 2nd and following lines contain the alarm string. Do not edit the header line. The Alarm-
Strings sheet is output based on the UserAlarm sheet, so some of the content may duplicate previous
content. When imported, the lowest duplicate content on the sheet is given priority.
The information entered in each line is described below. Lines A and B are for the purpose of identifying
where a string is used during editing. These are disregarded when imported.

Line Setting Item Description

A Alarm ID Alarm ID on UserAlarm sheet.
B Type Indicates whether an alarm is used in Message or Details on the User-
Alarm sheet.
C Resource Group Group name of resource. For the root that exists by default, enter [root].
Name
D Resource ID Resource ID of alarm string.
E and following Language name Alarm string of each language.
Culture

Information sheet
The information sheet is used by the system. Do not edit.

11 - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-5 Import/Export Resources

11-5 Import/Export Resources

This section describes importing and exporting of resources. Only general strings and alarm strings can
be imported and exported.

11-5-1 Importing Resources

You can import all resources at once, or import only a specific group of resources.

Importing All Resources at Once 11

1 Right click a resource. Select Import from the menu.

11-5-1 Importing Resources

2 Click Browse.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 13

11 Other Functions

3 Select the file and click Open.

4 Select the resources you want to import, and click OK.

11 - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

Importing a Specific Group

11-5 Import/Export Resources

1 Open the group you want to import.

11

11-5-1 Importing Resources

2 Click .

3 Select the file and click Open.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 15

11 Other Functions

11-5-2 Exporting Resources

You can export all resources at once, or export only a specific group of resources.

Exporting All Resources at Once

1 Right click a resource. Select Export from the menu.

2 Click Browse.

11 - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

3 Set a file name and click Save.

11-5 Import/Export Resources

11

11-5-2 Exporting Resources

4 Select the resources you want to export, and click OK.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 17

11 Other Functions

Exporting a Specific Group

1 Open the group you want to export.

2 Click .

3 Set a file name and click Save.

11 - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-5-3 File Format

11-5 Import/Export Resources

An Excel workbook is used to import or export resources.
The workbook contains the following sheets. Do not change the sheet name.

Sheet name Editing Description

GeneralStrings Yes Set general strings.
AlarmStrings Yes Set alarm strings.
Information No Used by the system. Do not edit.

GeneralStrings sheet 11
Set general strings in the GeneralStrings sheet. The first line is a header, and the 2nd and following
lines contain the general strings. Do not edit the header line.

11-5-3 File Format

Line Setting Item Description
A Group Name Group name. For the root that exists by default, enter [root].
B Resource ID Resource ID.
C and following Language name General strings of each language.
[Culture]

AlarmsStrings sheet
Set alarm strings in the AlarmStrings sheet. The first line is a header, and the 2nd and following lines
contain the user alarm information. Do not edit the header line.

Line Setting Item Description

A Group Name Group name. For the root that exists by default, enter [root].
B Resource ID Resource ID.
C and following Language name Alarm string of each language.
[Culture]

Information sheet
The information sheet is used by the system. Do not edit.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 19

11 Other Functions

11-6 Import/Export Object Properties

This section describes importing and exporting of object properties. Only text, variables, and expres-
sions of some objects can be imported and exported. Use this when using the same project to create a
derivative project, with changes to only the text and variable assignments.

11-6-1 Importing Object Properties

This section explains how to import object properties.
When the same settings already exist, they are overwritten. Settings that do not exist in the workbook
retain the state they had before importing.

1 Select Tool - Import Object Properties from the menu.

2 Select the file and click Open.

11 - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-6 Import/Export Object Properties

11-6-2 Exporting Object Properties
This section explains how to export object properties.

1 Select Tool - Export Object Properties from the menu.

11

11-6-2 Exporting Object Properties

Set a file name and click Save.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 21

11 Other Functions

11-6-3 File Format

An Excel workbook is used to import or export object properties. The workbook contains the following
sheets. Do not change the sheet name.

Sheet name Editing Description

Settings Yes Set the properties of the object.
GeneralStrings Yes Set general strings that are used in the Settings sheet.
Information No Used by the system. Do not edit.

Settings sheet
In the Setting sheet, set the properties of the object placed on the page. The first line is a header, and
the 2nd and following lines contain the object properties. Do not edit the header line.

Line Setting Item Description

A Page Name Name of the page.
B Object Name Name of the object. Objects included in IAG have the following names:
IAG object name.object name
C Property Name Name of the property.
D Setting Property setting.
For text, set the resource ID. For a variable or an expression, set the vari-
able or expression.

Additional Information

When editing texts allocated to objects which are included in IAG, note the following.
IAG resources are allocated by default to the texts allocated to the objects included to IAG.
They are displayed in the Setting column as resource IDs like [iag]XXX. To edit text of an object
included in a specific IAG object, select a normal resource which does not have [iag] on its
head. IAG resources of the corresponding IAG and normal resources are applicable to use
within IAG. IAG resources for other IAGs are not applicable.

The correspondences between the property type of the corresponding object and the character string
set in Property Name are described below. Objects included in IAG are excluded.

Object Type Property Name in Sysmac Studio Property Name on sheet

Button General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - Text (Default) - Resource ID Text
Set Button General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - TextButtonUp (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - TextButtonDown (Default) - Resource ID TextOn
Behavior - Variable Variable*1
Behavior - Feedback Expression FeedbackExpression*1
Toggle Button General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - TextButtonUp (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - TextButtonDown (Default) - Resource ID TextOn
Behavior - Variable Variable*1
Behavior - Feedback Expression FeedbackExpression*1

11 - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-6 Import/Export Object Properties

Object Type Property Name in Sysmac Studio Property Name on sheet
Momentary General - Type ResourceKey
Button Appearance - TextButtonUp (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - TextButtonDown (Default) - Resource ID TextOn
Behavior - Variable Variable*1
Behavior - Feedback Expression FeedbackExpression*1
Reset Button General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - TextButtonUp (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - TextButtonDown (Default) - Resource ID TextOn
Behavior - Variable Variable*1
Behavior - Feedback Expression FeedbackExpression*1
Bit Lamp General - Type ResourceKey 11
Appearance - TextOff (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - TextOn (Default) - Resource ID TextOn

11-6-3 File Format

Behavior - Expression Expression*1
Data Lamp General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - DefaultText (Default) - Resource ID Text
Behavior - Expression Expression*1
Behavior - ColorRanges - [*] - Text (Default) colorRange*.Text*1
Text Box General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - Text (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - Text (Default) - Expression Expression
Label General - Type ResourceKey
Appearance - Text (Default) - Resource ID Text
Appearance - Text (Default) - Expression Expression
IAG General - Type ResourceKey
Behavior(Input) - User-Defined Input Variable Input.User-Defined Input Variable
Behavior(In/Out) - InOut.User-Defined I/O Variable InOut.User-Defined I/O Variable
*1. Objects included in IAG are not output.

GeneralStrings sheet
Set general strings in the GeneralStrings sheet. The first line is a header, and the 2nd and following
lines contain the general strings. Do not edit the header line. This is output based on the Settings sheet,
so some of the content may duplicate previous content. When imported, the lowest duplicate content
on the sheet is given priority.
The information entered in each line is described below. Lines A to C are for the purpose of identifying
where a string is used during editing. These are disregarded when imported.

Line Setting Item Description

A Page Name Name of the page.
B Object Name Name of the object.
C Property Name Name of the property.
D Resource Group Name Name of resource group. For the root that exists by default, enter
[root]. For an IAG resource, the name is [iag] IAG collection
name.IAG name,{GUID}.
E Resource ID Resource ID.
F and following Language name Culture General strings of each language.

Information sheet
The information sheet is used by the system. Do not edit.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 23

11 Other Functions

11-7 Importing/Exporting Pages

You can import/export pages often used by specifying each page.

11-7-1 Importing Pages

Use the following procedure to import a page. When Import is executed, variables as well as resources
used in the page are also imported in the same way as Paste.

Additional Information

An Import can be only executed when the version of Runtime on the device to execute Import is
later than that of the version of Runtime used when the data to be imported was created.

1 Right-click on Page Group. Select Import from the menu.

2 Select the file to import and click Open.

3 The page is imported.

11 - 24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 11 Other Functions

11-7 Importing/Exporting Pages

11-7-2 Exporting Pages
Use the following procedure to export pages. When Export is executed, variables as well as resources
used in the page are also exported in the same way as Copy.

1 Right-click on Page. Select Export from the menu.

11

11-7-2 Exporting Pages

2 Select the folder to export the page to, specify the file name, and click Save.

3 The page is exported.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) 11 - 25

11 Other Functions

11 - 26 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Appendices
A
The appendices provide information on supported file formats and other information.

A-1 Events and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-2 Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-3 Specifications of User Alarm Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-4 Specifications of Data Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-5 Specifications of Operation Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A-6 Differences between the Physical HMI and Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-7 Version Upgrade History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-7-1 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio and Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-7-2 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A-7-3 Sysmac Studio Corresponding Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-7-4 Runtime Support Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-8 Precautions for Version Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A-1

 Appendices

A-1 Events and Actions

Events

Global User
Name Description Page Objects IAG
events alarms
The event occurs when the user alarm is
Acknowledged ― ― ― Yes ―
acknowledged.
The event occurs when the check box is
Checked ― ― Yes ― ―
selected.
The event occurs when the user alarm is
Cleared ― ― ― Yes ―
cleared.
Click*1 The event occurs when the object is tapped. ― ― Yes ― ―
The event occurs when the set condition is
Condition Yes Yes ― ― Yes
met.
F1 Key Click*1 *2 The event occurs when the F1 Key is tapped. Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
The event occurs while the F1 Key is held
F1 Key Press*2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
down.
The event occurs when the F1 Key is
F1 Key Release*1 *2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
released.
F2 Key Click*1 *2 The event occurs when the F2 Key is tapped. Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
The event occurs while the F2 Key is held
F2 Key Press*2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
down.
The event occurs when the F2 Key is
F2 Key Release*1 *2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
released.
F3 Key Click*1 *2 The event occurs when the F3 Key is tapped. Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
The event occurs while the F3 Key is held
F3 Key Press*2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
down.
The event occurs when the F3 Key is
F3 Key Release*1 *2 Yes Yes*3 ― ― ―
released.
Interval The event occurs at the specified interval. Yes ― ― ― ―
Page Displayed The event occurs while the page is displayed. ― Yes ― ― ―
Page Hidden The event occurs when the page is hidden. ― Yes ― ― ―
The event occurs while the object is held
Press ― ― Yes ― ―
down.
The event occurs when the project is initial-
Project Initialization*4 Yes ― ― ― ―
ized.
The event occurs when the user alarm
Raised ― ― ― Yes ―
occurs.
The event occurs when the object is
Release*1 ― ― Yes ― ―
released.
The event occurs when the item selected in
Selection Changed ― ― Yes ― ―
the list changes.
The event occurs when the check box selec-
Unchecked ― ― Yes ― ―
tion is cleared.
*1. For both Click and Release, the event occurs when the object is released, but the operation when the page is
changed is different. If the page changes when an object set for Click is touched but not yet released, the event
does not occur. If the page changes when an object set for Release is touched but not yet released, the event
does occur.
*2. The event is enabled only while a user-created page is displayed. The event is disabled while functions built
into the system such as the System Menu are operating.
*3. These events are ignored for popup pages.
*4. The results of accessing external variables during project initialization immediately after startup are not always
dependable. Do not access external variables during project initialization.

A-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

Actions

Global User
Action Description Page Objects IAG
events alarms

BuzzerOff Turns OFF the buzzer. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A-1 Events and Actions

BuzzerOn Turns ON the buzzer. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Turns ON the buzzer that beeps for

BuzzerOneShot *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
only 0.25 second.
Executes a subroutine registered
CallSubroutine as a global subroutine or page sub- Yes*2 Yes Yes Yes*2 Yes
routine.
ClearUserAlarmLog Clears the user alarm log. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A
ClosePage Closes the specified page. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Subtracts the specified value from
DecreaseVariable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
the specified variable.
Enables removing the SD Memory
EjectSDMemory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Card.
Enables or disables inputs on the
EnableInputOperation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
touch panel.
EndSyncLock*3 Ends a critical section. Yes --- --- --- ---
Adds the specified value to the
IncreaseVariable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
specified variable.
Inverts the value of the specified
InvertVariable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Boolean variable.
Login Displays the login page. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Logout Logs out the user. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Changes the value of the specified
ResetVariable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Boolean variable to False.
Captures the screen displayed on
SaveScreenshot Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
the HMI.
SaveUserAlarmLog-
Saves the user alarm log to a file. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ToFile
Changes the IME language set-
SetIMEType Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
tings.
SetInputFocus Sets the data input focus. --- Yes Yes --- Yes
Changes the project language set-
SetLanguage Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
tings.*4
Sets the value of the specified vari-
SetVariable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
able to a specified value.
Displays the page set in a specified
ShowAlarmPage Yes Yes Yes Yes ---
User Alarm.
ShowDocu- Displays a PDF or other file full
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ment(FULL SCREEN) screen.
ShowDocument(Win- Displays a PDF or other file in a
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
dow) window.
ShowPage*5 Displays a page. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Displays the most recently dis-
ShowPreviousPage*5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
played page.
ShowSystemMenu Displays the System Menu. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Displays the NJ/NX/NY Trouble-
ShowTroubleshooter Yes Yes Yes Yes ---
shooter.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A-3

 Appendices

Global User
Action Description Page Objects IAG
events alarms
StartDataLogging Starts data logging. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
StartSafetyMonitor Displays the Safety Monitor. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
StopDataLogging Stops data logging. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ShowOperation-
Displays the Operation Log Viewer. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LogViewer
StartOperationLog Starts operation logging. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
StopOperationLog Stops operation logging. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SyncLock*3 Starts a critical section. Yes --- --- --- ---
Sets the UserEvents for IAG
TriggerEvent --- --- --- --- Yes
objects.
*1. When multiple actions attempt to simultaneously beep buzzers, the last buzzer demand overwrites the previ-
ous demands.
*2. You cannot execute page subroutines for global events or user alarms.
*3. The SyncLock and EndSyncLock actions must be specified as a pair.
*4. Asynchronous execution is not supported.
*5. If you execute an action with a Momentary Button, use a Click or Release event.

Additional Information

If the same variable might be accessed simultaneously from different locations, such as for
simultaneous execution of subroutines, perform exclusive control to prevent simultaneous
access.
For a section where exclusive control is required, specify the start of the section with the Syn-
cLock action and the end of the section with the EndSyncLock action. This defines the section
between these two actions as a critical section. Until the execution of the critical section is com-
pleted, other processing will not be executed, therefore achieving exclusive control.

A-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-2 Supported Formats

The HMI objects support the following formats. However, it may not be possible to display some files
even if the file format is supported.

A-2 Supported Formats

Image Files
The following formats are supported.

Exten-
Format name Specifications
sion
Microsoft Windows Bit- BMP 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, or 32-bit
map Image Uncompressed or RLE compression
Graphics Interchange GIF 1, 4, or 8-bit
A
Format Interlaced GIF is supported. Transparent color (Runtime version 1.08 or
later) is supported. Animation GIFs are displayed as still images.
JFIF or EXIF JPG 8-bit gray scale
24-bit/basic DCT or progressive DCT
Portable Network Graph- PNG 1, 4, 8, or 24-bit
ics Transparency is supported only when the α channel is saved for each
pixel.
Scalable Vector Graphics SVG SVG 1.0 is supported.

Extensible Application XAML

Markup Language
Drawing Exchange For- DXF R12 and older are supported.
mat

Video
The following formats are supported. However, only progressive formats are supported. The maximum
size of the file that can be registered in a project in Sysmac Studio is 100 MB.

Exten- Maximum
Format name Specifications
sion resolution
MPEG-1 mpg The MPEG-1 Video Stream format is not supported. 768×480
MPEG-2 mpg Main Profile Low, Main, and High 1440 1280×720
MPEG-2 TS is not supported.
MPEG-4 Part 2*1 mp4 Simple Profile L0, L1, L2, and L3 1280×720
Advanced Simple Profile L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5
Global motion compensation is not supported.
MPEG-4 Part 10 mp4 Baseline Profile L1, L1.2, L1.3, L2, L2.2, and L3 1280×720
(H.264) Main Profile L1, L1.2, L1.3, L2, L2.2, L3, L3.1, L3.2, and L4.1
High Profile L1, L1.2, L1.3, L2, L2.2, L3, L3.1, L3.2, and L4.1
Windows Media Video wmv WMV9 240×160
*1. Not supported on the NA5--V1.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A-5

 Appendices

Files Supported by Document Viewer

The Document Viewer can display the following files. The maximum size of file that can be registered in
a project in Sysmac Studio is 16 MB.

Exten-
Format name Specifications
sion
Adobe Acrobat Document PDF PDF 1.5 and later are not supported.
Microsoft Excel Books xlsx
Microsoft Excel 97-2003 Books xls
Microsoft Word Documents docx
Microsoft Word 97-2003 Docu- doc
ments

A-6 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-3 Specifications of User Alarm Log

A-3 Specifications of User Alarm Log Files

Files
The specifications of user alarm log files are shown below.

Specifications of Files
File format: CSV file
Encoding method: UTF-8 (with BOM (Runtime version 1.15 or later), without BOM (Runtime version
1.14 or earlier))
Delimiter character: , (0x2c)
File name: File name specified by the user in SaveUserAlarmLogToFile of the action or at
SaveUserAlarmLogToFile A

Recording Specifications
Recording specifications are shown below.

Column Item Description

1 Date and Time The last update date/time (UTC) of a record is output in the date/time for-
mat in accordance with the currently selected project language.
2 Name The name of the user alarm is output.
3 Alarm Code The alarm code of the user alarm is output.
4 Message The message of the user alarm is output.
5 Group Display Name The group display name of the user alarm is output.
6 Order of Priority The order of priority of the user alarm is output.
7 Status The status at the time the user alarm was saved is output.
8 Logged-in User The name of the currently logged-in user at the time the user alarm was
saved is output.
9 Additional Information The additional information of the user alarm is output.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A-7

 Appendices

A-4 Specifications of Data Log Files

The specifications of data log files are shown below.

Specifications of Files
File format: CSV file
Encoding method: UTF-8 (with BOM)
Delimiter character: , (0x2c)
File name: File name naming rules are shown below.
\Data Logging\Log Files\[data set name]\[file generation year/month/day]\[file generation hour/min-
ute]_[index].csv
• [file generation year/month/day]: YYYYMMDD
• [file generation hour/minute]: hhmm*1 *2
• [index]: 3-digit serial number (default: 000) Duplicate values are incremented by “1”.
*1. Fixed at “0000” when the new data log file generation interval is Daily.
*2. The mm section is fixed at “00” when Hours is selected for the unit when the new data log file generation
interval is After specific time period.

Recording Specifications
Recording specifications are shown below. The first line is a header and the data is recorded in the sec-
ond and following lines.
The number of columns from the second column onwards is variable depending on the contents of the
data set.

Column Item Description

1 Date/time that the record The date/time (UTC) that the record was recorded is output. The output
was recorded format is fixed at YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.fff.
2 Value of 1st variable The value of the 1st variable in the corresponding data set is output.
3 Value of 2nd variable The value of the 2nd variable in the corresponding data set is output.
• • •
• • •
• • •
n Value of nth variable The value of the nth variable in the corresponding data set is output.

A-8 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-5 Specifications of Operation Log Files

A-5 Specifications of Operation Log Files

Specifications of operation log file are shown below.

Specifications of files
File format: CSV file
Encoding method: UTF-8 (with BOM)
Delimiter character: , (0x2c)
File name: File name specified at SaveOperationLogToFile by the user

Recording specifications
A
Recording specifications are shown below. The first line is a header and the data in the second and fol-
lowing lines are recorded.
Information entered in each column differs according to the recording operation.

Column Item Description

1 Date and Time Outputs the time the operation occurred in UTC. The output format
according to Locale is used.
2 User Outputs the user account that was logged in when the operation was exe-
cuted.
3 Category Outputs the operation category.
4 Operation Outputs the name of the operation.
5 Operation Information1 Outputs detailed information of the operation.
6 Operation Information2
7 Page
8 Action Outputs the action name.
9 Action Information1 Outputs detailed information of the action.
10 Action Information2
11 Value before
12 Value after

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A-9

 Appendices

 Output specifications of each operation

Columns 1 to 7 output the description that correspond with each operation. The output specifica-
tions are shown below.

Date
Operation Operation
Operation and User Category Page
Information1 Information2
Time
Startup Date User System
Exit and Accounts
Time
Start transfer/synchronisation Transfer type
Finish transfer/synchronisation
Execute Project
Synchronization
Show System Menu
Exit System Menu
Show Troubleshooter Controller name Page name
Exit Troubleshooter
Show Safety Monitor
Exit Safety Monitor
Show Operation Log Viewer
Exit Operation Log Viewer
Disable touch input
Enable touch input
Start screensaver
End screensaver
Connect to VNC server IP address
Disconnect VNC server IP address
Connect to FTP server IP address
Disconnect FTP server IP address
Connect with FTP Client Host User name
Disconnect with FTP Client Host User name
Change System settings Setting item
name
Login User User name Login result
Logout
Switch user User name Login result
Set language *1 Locale

IME change*1
Write recipe Recipe Template name Recipe name
Read recipe Template name Recipe name
Start Data logging Data Logging Data set name
Stop Data logging Data set name
Start Operation logging Operation
Stop Operation logging Log
Object operation User Object name Name Page
Operation name
Function Key operation Function Key Name Page
name name
*1. A value only for Set language and IME change is output to Value before and Value after in columns 11 to
12.

Operation Value before Value after

Set language Languages before change Languages after change
IME change Type before change Type after change

A - 10 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

 Output specifications of action-related columns

A-5 Specifications of Operation Log Files

Values that correspond to actions associated with the operation are recorded in columns 8 to 12.
The output specifications are shown below.

Action Action Value Value

Action executed Action
Information1 Information2 before after
BuzzerOff BuzzerOff
BuzzerOn BuzzerOn
BuzzerOneShot BuzzerOneShot
Subroutines Subroutine name
ClearUserAlarmLog ClearUserAlarmLog
ClosePage ClosePage Page name
DecreaseVariable DecreaseVariable Variable Value Value
name before after
EjectSDMemory EjectSDMemory
EnableInputOperation EnableInputOperation
IncreaseVariable IncreaseVariable Variable
name
Value
before
Value
after
A
InvertVariable InvertVariable Variable Value Value
name before after
Login Login
Logout Logout
ResetVariable ResetVariable Variable Value Value
name before after
SaveScreenshot SaveScreenshot
SaveUserAlarmLogToFile SaveUserAlarmLogToFile
SetIMEType SetIMEType
SetInputFocus SetInputFocus
SetLanguage SetLanguage
SetVariable SetVariable Variable Value Value
name before after
ShowPage (user alarm) ShowPage (user alarm) Page name Viewer name
ShowDocument (FULL ShowDocument (FULL Document
SCREEN) SCREEN) name
ShowDocument (Window) ShowDocument (Window) Document
name
ShowPage ShowPage Page name
ShowPreviousPage ShowPreviousPage
ShowSystemMenu ShowSystemMenu
ShowTroubleshooter ShowTroubleshooter
StartSafetyMonitor StartSafetyMonitor
ShowOperationLogViewer ShowOperationLogViewer
StartDataLogging StartDataLogging
StopDataLogging StopDataLogging
StartOperationLogging StartOperationLogging
StopOperationLogging StopOperationLogging
Change value using the keypad EditVariable
Selection changed using the
radio button
Selection changed in a drop
button/list box
Change tab page
State changed in a toggle
button/check box
Value changed using a slider

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 11

 Appendices

A-6 Differences between the Physical HMI

and Simulator
The following major differences exist between the physical HMI and Simulator. In addition, the display
by the simulator is not guaranteed to be completely compatible with the physical HMI.
• Trend Graph and Broken-line Graph Objects
The Simulator does not update graphic displays. Fixed still images are displayed.
• ShowDocument Action and ShowDocument Function
The Simulator ignores parameters that specify the display positions and sizes for documents. To dis-
play documents, there must be a compatible application, such as Adobe Reader. The application
used to display a document will not be exited when the Simulator is exited or the page is changed
after the document is displayed. Exit the application manually.
• ShowTroubleshooter Action and ShowTroubleshooter Function
The Simulator cannot display the NJ/NX/NY Troubleshooter.
• _HMI_Brightness Variables
The brightness of the screen does not change for the Simulator.
• Media Player Object
There may be some differences in the behavior or timing when a video is replayed. The Simulator
does not execute actions/functions that operate a Media Player object.
• Operation Log
The Simulator cannot run functions related to Operation Log.
• Safety Monitor
The Simulator cannot run functions related to Safety Monitor.

A - 12 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-7 Version Upgrade History

This section describes the additions and improvements that were made during version upgrades.

A-7 Version Upgrade History

A-7-1 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio and Runtime
Sysmac Studio Version 1.10 and Runtime Version 1.00

Item Description
First release Support added for NA-series Programmable Terminals.

Sysmac Studio Version 1.11 and Runtime Version 1.01.

Item Description A
Uploading Added support for uploading.
Expansion of popup page func- Expanded functionality for popup pages, such as the addition of display

A-7-1 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio and Runtime

tionality position specifications.
Expansion of IAG functionality Expanded functionality for IAG variables. Also added support for a Condition
event.
Expansion of settings for object Expanded settings related to appearance, such as adding vertical text for
appearance some objects.
Addition of data logging Added Data Log and Trend Graph objects.

Sysmac Studio Version 1.13 and Runtime Version 1.02.

Item Description
Support for NX7-series Control- Added support for connection to NX7-series Controllers and NJ1-series
lers and NJ1-series Controllers Controllers.
Addition of NJ/NX Troubleshooter Added support for the NJ/NX Troubleshooter.
Addition of system variables for Added _HMI_ConnectedVNCClientCount system variable that represents
VNC function the number of clients that are connected to the HMI via VNC.

Sysmac Studio Version 1.14 and Runtime Version 1.03.

Item Description
Addition of broken-line graph func- Added support for the broken-line graph function.
tion
Expansion of NJ/NX-series trouble- Expanded functionality to display/delete event logs of the EtherCAT slave
shooter functionality units. Also added support that allows the troubleshooter to switch to a user
screen.
Support for union/enumeration vari- Enabled handling of union and enumeration variables of NJ/NX-series
ables Controllers, as well as inputting and displaying of them on HMIs.
Support for creating new structure Enabled creating new structure variables in the HMI.
variables
Expanded maximum number of The number of global variables that can be registered in a connected
variables registered in a connected device was expanded to 30,000.
device
Expansion of IAG functionality Enabled settings of user events for IAG.
HMI Main Unit screen capture func- Enabled capturing screens displayed on the HMI.
tionality
Custom keypad functionality Enabled creation of system keypads with user-specified sizes. Also added
support for editing then to make a user-specific colored/shaped keypad.
Tabbing order functionality Enabled settings of order in which to tab around the input focus during
data input.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 13

 Appendices

Item Description
Scale conversion functionality for Enabled scale conversion of numeric values.
numeric values
Indirect addressing of text strings Enabled indirect addressing of text strings that are displayed on objects.
Buzzer function Enabled sounding a buzzer from the HMI when a button is pressed, and
when an alarm occurs, or for other events.
Page jump from an alarm message Enabled a page jump from an alarm screen specified in the Alarm Viewer
to a specified screen to a specified screen.
Enhanced VNC functionality Support for accesses control of VNC clients for various conditions.
Addition of tab control objects Added tab control objects.
Support for background processing Added support for background processing of subroutines to enable parallel
of subroutines processing with updating of the display.
Input of Japanese and Asian lan- Enabled input of Japanese, Chinese (traditional and simplified), and
guages Korean in data input objects.

Sysmac Studio Version 1.15 and Runtime Version 1.04.

Item Description
Expansion of button object func- Enabled combinations of buttons with lamp functionality using variable val-
tionality ues.
Indirect specification of The upper/lower limit values for an object such as Data Edit can now be
upper/lower limit values dynamically changed by using variables.
Function to specify a page number Numerical values can now be assigned to pages, allowing the pages to be
switched by using the assigned values.
Sorting and filtering of displayed Enabled setting for sorting displayed items by default.
items in User Alarms Viewer Enabled filtering of displayed alarms by a keyword for each item.
Improved operability of some Enabled changing the size of the CheckBox, Slider, and Radio Button
objects objects.

Sysmac Studio Version 1.16 and Runtime Version 1.05.

Item Description
Improved operability of User Enabled displaying the filtering state of User Alarm Viewer objects.
Alarm Viewer objects

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.17 Runtime Ver.1.06

Item Description
Support for NY-series Enabled connection to NY-series.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.17 Runtime Ver.1.07

Item Description
Support for NX1-series Enabled connection to NX1-series CPU Unit.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.18 Runtime Ver.1.08

Item Description
Improved functionality for Retain The number of characters can now be set for String-type Retain variables.
variables
Expanded functionality for data The character encoding method can now be converted for data display
display objects and data input objects and data input objects.
objects

A - 14 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.23, Runtime Ver.1.09

Item Description
Support for NX102 Series Connection to an NX102 Series CPU Unit is now possible.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.24, Runtime Ver.1.10

A-7 Version Upgrade History

Item Description
Support for NX-CSG320 Connection to an NX-CSG320 CPU Unit is now possible.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.27, Runtime Ver.1.11

Item Description
Support for fonts in multiple lan- Object font settings can now be set in each language.
guages

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.31, Runtime Ver.1.12

A
Item Description
FTP Client FTP Client functions are now supported.

A-7-1 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio and Runtime

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.40, Runtime Ver.1.11

Item Description
Support for Soft-NA Soft-NA is now supported.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.40, Runtime Ver.1.13

Item Description
Support for Operation Log Operation Log is now supported.
Support for Safety Monitor Safety Monitor is now supported.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.40, Runtime Ver.1.08 to Ver.1.13

Item Description
Support for NA5-W-V1 The NA5-W-V1 is now supported.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.42, Runtime Ver.1.13

Item Description
Support for NJ501-R00 controller Connection to NJ501-R00 is now possible.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.43, Runtime Ver.1.14

Item Description
Support for alarm time elapsed Display of the elapsed time after an alarm occurs in the user alarm object is
now supported.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.45, Runtime Ver.1.15

Item Description
Support for user alarm attached Added support for inserting a variable value in the message when a user
information alarm occurs.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.50, Runtime Ver.1.16

Item Description
Supported secure communication Support for secure communication with the NJ/NX series.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 15

 Appendices

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.54, Runtime Ver.1.16

Item Description
Support for display of multiple The number of graph objects that can be placed in a single page in Soft-NA
graphs has been increased to two.
Support for secure communication In Soft-NA, secure communication with the NJ/NX series is supported.

Sysmac Studio Ver.1.54, Runtime Ver.1.17

Item Description
Support for CS series, CP series Connection to the CS series and CP series is now enabled.
Support for serial connection Serial connection with the CS/CJ/CP series is now enabled.
Support for NX502-series Connection to an NX502-series CPU Unit is now possible.

A - 16 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-7-2 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio Only

Version 1.11

Item Description

A-7 Version Upgrade History

Support for copying settings Added support to copy settings for user alarm tables, data sets, and recipe
templates and paste them into external applications.
Improvement to property display Enabled displaying properties by double-clicking objects.
method

Version 1.13

Item Description
Support to copy CJ/NJ variable Added support to copy and paste variables directly from the Sysmac Studio
settings and CX-Programmer.
A
Version 1.14

A-7-2 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio Only

Item Description
Enhanced Search and Replace Expanded target for the Search and Replace function to all the texts within a
functionality project.
Support for the simulation mode Enabled confirmation of indications such as the ON/OFF status of Lamps
and other objects.
Sysmac Studio printing functional- Enabled printing of information including project settings with HMI selected.
ity
Direct text editing Enabled direct editing of Labels on the Page Editor.
Importing of vector graphic files Enabled selecting of vector graphic files (e.g.,.XAML files) for the Image files
of objects.
Improved Watch Tab Page Enabled constant monitoring of global variables.
Cross reference function Enabled cross reference when the HMI is selected.

Version 1.15

Item Description
Function to change Button type The Button Type such as Set or Momentary can now be changed by the set-
ting of properties.
Improved procedures to add vari- A variable can now be created and added to the variable table directly from
ables the variable setting field.
Improved operation of specifying The function has been expanded to open the Code Editor (for editing sub-
subroutines routines).
A subroutine can now be created from the Properties Window.
Japanese translation of items in The items in the Properties Window are now shown in Japanese under a
Properties Japanese environment.
Serial creation of multiple objects It is now possible to create more than one object with the same appearance
and settings at the same time.

Version 1.16

Item Description
Version control Enabled version control.

Version 1.18

Item Description
Improved functionality for Retain Validation is now executed for the total number and total size of Retain vari-
variables ables when a project is built.
Resource usage status You can now check the usage of Retain variables.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 17

 Appendices

Version 1.20

Item Description
Enhanced workability between Enhanced workability between devices, such as opening windows of differ-
devices ent devices at the same time.
Improved copy and paste The global variables and subroutines referenced by objects during object
copy and paste are automatically copied.
Increased cross reference range Added data groups, recipes, and data sets as cross reference targets.
Image preview When selecting an image to be pasted on an object, a preview of the image
is displayed.
Incremental build Added support for incremental build.
Deletion of all Imported IAGs Added support for a function that deletes all Imported IAGs that are not
used.

Version 1.22

Item Description
Improvement of Code Editor Per- Performance when editing a large amount of source code has been
formance improved.
Improvement of user alarm opera- Grid sorting when configuring group settings is supported.
bility
Improvement of resource opera- "Undo" is supported in the resource editing software.
bility
Image file output of pages A function for saving a page as an image file is supported.

Version 1.24

Item Description
Support for subroutine searches Added support for a function that searches for the place where a subroutine
is used from the Code Explorer.
Importing and exporting of devices Added support for importing and exporting devices.
Support for editing Resource IDs Added support for editing a Resource ID set for an object.

Version 1.25

Item Description
Set as default Added support for setting initial value of object properties.

Version 1.26

Item Description
Simulator Properties and other items can be edited while the simulator is running.

Version 1.27

Item Description
Import/Export User Alarm Importing and exporting of user alarms is supported.
Importing and exporting of all Importing and exporting of all resources at once is supported.
resources
Importing and exporting of object Importing and exporting of object properties is supported.
properties
Simulator • A function for displaying any page is supported.
• A function for switching the project language is supported.
• A screen shot function is supported.
Language settings • The default language can now be changed.
• Default font settings can now be set.
Variable mapping A function that automatically executes variable mapping is supported.

A - 18 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

Version 1.40

Item Description
Support for specifying the size for The size can now be specified when outputting image files.
the Image File Output
Support for exporting resource Exporting resource files is supported.

A-7 Version Upgrade History

files
Support for importing and export- Importing and exporting pages is supported.
ing pages
Support for replacing the name of Replacement is now executed when the name of a page is changed.
pages
Support for displaying property by Property window and other items are now displayed by default when such
default as creating a new project.

Version 1.41

Item Description A
Improvement of copy-and-paste Brackets are now automatically replaced with appropriate ones when copy-
function ing and pasting array variables between the controller and HMI.

A-7-2 Version Upgrade History for Sysmac Studio Only

Improvement of text input Texts and resource IDs are now displayed in the drop-down list which is dis-
played when entering texts and resource Ids from the property.

Version 1.43

Item Description
Automatic application of variable Device variable comments are automatically applied to HMI variables.
comment
Support for upload function A function specializes in uploading is supported.
Improvement of resource editing A mode to always overwrite existing resources when editing text in proper-
ties is now supported.

Version 1.45

Item Description
Improvement of performance Overall performance when using HMI has been improved.
Improvement of operability The general user interface of the Properties Window has been improved.
Animation is integrated into the Properties Window.
Support for displaying variables A function for displaying the variables assigned on objects in the page edi-
tor is now supported.
Improvement of jump function after Improvements have been made so that the focus moves to the appropriate
search position when jumping to a resource after a search.
Support for searching unused vari- Searching unused variables in the global variable table is now supported.
ables
Improvement of build errors The error details displayed during building have been improved.

Version 1.46

Item Description
Support for Animations Window The Animations Window is once again supported.
Support for changing the size of the Changing the size of the Animations dialog box is supported.
Animations dialog box

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 19

 Appendices

Version 1.47

Item Description
Support for font replacement A function to replace the font-related settings under specified conditions is
supported.
Support for forced remapping A function that rebuilds the variable mapping information is supported.
Improvement of user interface Made improvements, such as supporting the copying of multiple objects in
the font settings.

Version 1.54

Item Description
Support for download function A specialized function for downloading is now supported.
Support for number of objects dis- The number of objects is now displayed in Page Explorer.
play
Support for deletion of unused A function for deleting unused resources is now supported.
resources
Support for IAG replacement A function for replacing IAGs is now supported.
Improvement of Resource Usage The number of global variables can now be checked in Resource Usage.
Support for device replacement A function for replacing device assignments is now supported.
Support for assignment mode A mode that displays only the variables and resource assignments in the
Properties Window has been added.

A - 20 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-7-3 Sysmac Studio Corresponding Versions

The table below shows the latest Runtime and system program versions included with each version of
Sysmac Studio.

A-7 Version Upgrade History

NA5- NA5--V1*1 Soft-NA
Sysmac Studio System System
Runtime Runtime Runtime Soft-NA
program program
1.10 1.00 1.1.0 - - - -
1.11 to 1.12 1.01*2 2.0.0 - - - -
1.13 1.02*3 3.0.3 - - - -
1.14 1.03*4 4.3.3 - - - -
1.15 1.03*4*5 4.4.1 - - - -
1.16 1.05*4 5.0.3 - - - -
1.17 5.1.5 - - - -
A
1.07*4
1.18 1.08*4 5.1.5 - - - -

A-7-3 Sysmac Studio Corresponding Versions

1.19 1.08 *3 5.2.2 - - - -
1.20 1.08*4 6.0.2 - - - -
1.23 1.09*4 7.0.5 - - - -
1.24 1.10*4 7.1.2 - - - -
1.24.2 1.10*4 7.2.1 - - - -
1.26 1.10*4 7.3.0 - - - -
1.27 1.11 *4 7.3.0 - - - -
1.31 1.12*4 7.4.0 - - - -
1.40 1.13*4 8.0.0 1.08 6.0.2 1.11 1.01
1.09 7.0.5
1.10 7.4.0
1.11 7.4.0
1.12 7.4.0
1.13 8.0.0
1.43 1.14 *4 8.0.0 1.14 8.0.0 1.11 1.01
1.44 1.14 *4 8.1.0 1.14 8.1.0 1.11 1.01
1.45 1.15*4 9.0.0 1.15 9.0.0 1.12 1.02
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.50 1.16 *4 10.1.0 1.16 10.1.0 - -
1.52 1.16*4 10.2.0 1.16 10.2.0 - -
1.54 1.17*4 11.0.0 1.17 11.0.0 1.16 1.02
1.17
*1. NA5--V1 supports only Runtime Ver.1.08 or higher.
*2. The projects created in version 1.00 are converted to version 1.01.
*3. The projects created in either version 1.00 or 1.01 are converted to version 1.02.
*4. Projects created in version 1.00, 1.01, or 1.02 are converted to version 1.03.
*5. The runtime version will be converted to 1.04 if the HMI Extended Option is enabled.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 21

 Appendices

Additional Information

Older versions of Runtime can be used with Sysmac Studio, but the internal version may have
changed due to bug fixes. The version of the system program required at that time may also
have changed. The required version of the system program is supplied with Sysmac Studio.
Follow the procedure to update it.

A-7-4 Runtime Support Limit

Support of Runtime is scheduled to end as follows. In principle, support ends three years after release
of the successor version.
In Sysmac Studio after Runtime support has ended, new projects can no longer be created by the cor-
responding Runtime version. When a project in the corresponding Runtime version has been loaded,
the project will be converted to the lowest version of currently supported Runtime versions.

Runtime Release Status End of support (scheduled)

1.00 June 2014 End of support September 2015
1.01 October 2014 End of support September 2015
1.02 April 2015 End of support September 2015
1.03 September 2015 Supported April 2024
1.04 April 2016 Supported April 2024
1.05 July 2016 Supported April 2024
1.06 August 2016 Supported April 2024
1.07 October 2016 Supported April 2024
1.08 February 2017 Supported April 2024
1.09 April 2018 Supported April 2024
1.10 July 2018 Supported April 2026
1.11 April 2019 Supported April 2026
1.12 December 2019 Supported April 2026
1.13 April 2020 Supported April 2026
1.14 October 2020 Supported April 2026
1.15 April 2021 Supported April 2026
1.16 June 2022 Supported April 2026
1.17 April 2023 Supported -

A - 22 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Appendices

A-8 Precautions for Version Upgrades

A-8 Precautions for Version Upgrades

Observe the following precautions for version upgrades.

 Sysmac Studio Version 1.14 and Runtime Version 1.03

• User-defined enumerations on external devices are not assigned during version upgrades. You
must redefine them.
• Some data type definition names are reserved for the data definitions of structures, unions, and
numerations on the HMI. An error will occur if a reserved name is used, in which case you must
change the name.

 Sysmac Studio Version 1.18 and Runtime Version 1.08

• The values of Retain variables are cleared when they are downloaded to NA Units with runtime
version 1.07 or lower. When downloading is completed, the NA Unit will be restarted and the
A
Retain variable area will be rebuilt, so approximately 10 seconds longer than for a normal restart
will be required. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the NA Unit while the Retain variable area is
being rebuilt.

 Sysmac Studio Version 1.27 and Runtime Version 1.11

• If you convert to Runtime Version 1.11, expansion of font settings may cause processing to take
10 minutes or longer, depending on the project size.

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) A - 23

 Appendices

A - 24 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

Index

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) I-1

 Index

A F

actions ...................................................................4-46, A-3 FINS settings ................................................................ 3-17

adding an HMI .............................................................. 2-16 Font Replacement Procedure ...................................... 4-63
alarms ............................................................................. 1-9 FTP .............................................................................. 10-3
animations ...................................................................... 5-7 FTP settings ................................................................. 3-15
functional objects ........................................................... 5-2
B
G
Battery ............................................................................ 1-9
breakpoints ..................................................................... 7-3 global events ................................................................ 4-46
building ......................................................................... 4-79 global subroutines ............................................... 4-48, 4-55
global variables .............................................................. 4-3
C graphic objects ............................................................... 5-4

Clear All Memory .......................................................... 3-31 H

Code Editor .................................................................. 4-61
Code Explorer ................................................................ 2-4 HMI clock ..................................................................... 3-28
Communications Setup .................................................. 6-4 HMI Code Editor ........................................................... 11-3
comparison results ......................................................... 8-5 HMI Name .................................................................... 3-29
connected devices .......................................................... 3-3 HMI projects ................................................................... 1-4
Continue .................................................................. 7-6, 7-7 HMI software configuration ............................................. 1-4
Copying the Font Settings ............................................ 4-64 HMI versions ................................................................ 2-17
creating a project file .................................................... 2-15 HMI Write ..................................................................... 3-30
creating pages .............................................................. 4-22
custom objects ............................................................. 9-16 I

D IAG collection settings .................................................... 9-5

IAG Replacement ......................................................... 4-72
data logging ........................................................... 1-9, 4-39 IAG resources .............................................................. 4-51
debugging functions ....................................................... 7-2 IAGs ........................................................................ 9-3, 9-6
Deletion of Unused Resources ..................................... 4-50 importing device variables .............................................. 3-6
device references ........................................................... 3-3 Importing Object Properties ....................................... 11-20
Device Replacement .................................................... 4-75 Importing Pages ......................................................... 11-24
device settings .............................................................. 3-12 Importing Resources .................................................. 11-13
differences between the physical HMI and Simulator ..A-12 Importing User Alarms ................................................. 11-7
internal connected devices ............................................. 3-3
E internal variables ............................................................ 4-3

entry assistance ........................................................... 2-10 L

entry methods for global variables ............................... 4-12
events ......................................................................1-7, A-2 language settings .................................................. 3-23, 9-4
events and actions ......................................................... 5-7 language specifications ................................................ 4-61
examples of using objects ............................................ 5-12
Exporting Object Properties ....................................... 11-21 M
Exporting Pages ......................................................... 11-25
Exporting Resources .................................................. 11-16 main pages ................................................................... 4-22
Exporting User Alarms ................................................. 11-9 mapping variables .......................................................... 3-7
external ........................................................................... 3-3 memory specifications .................................................... 1-6
external connected devices ............................................ 3-3 menu .............................................................................. 2-7
external variables .............................................3-8, 4-3, 4-6 Multiview Explorer .......................................................... 2-3

I-2 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

 Index

N S

NA-series Programmable Terminals ...............................1-2 Scaling the Font Size to the Specified Magnification ....4-70
new user alarm .............................................................4-35 search and replace .......................................................4-62
notation for CustomDisplayFormat .................................5-6 security settings ............................................................3-21
notation for expression ....................................................5-6 serial IDs .........................................................................6-7
NTP settings .................................................................3-16 set as default .......................................................4-30, 4-31
simulator connection .......................................................6-2
O step execution .................................................................7-5
step-in execution .............................................................7-5
object attributes ...............................................................5-4 step-out execution ..........................................................7-6
object list .........................................................................5-2 storage media .................................................................8-8
objects ..................................................................... 1-5, 5-2 subroutine execution .....................................................4-56
offline comparison .........................................................4-81 subroutine group ...........................................................4-48
offline debugging ................................................... 7-9, 7-10 subroutine variables ...............................................4-3, 4-20
online connection ............................................................6-2 subroutines ............................................................1-8, 4-55
operating procedure ......................................................1-10 supported formats .......................................................... A-5
operation log .................................................................5-35 synchronizing projects ....................................................8-2
Operation Log Settings .................................................3-25 system-defined variables ............................. 4-3, 4-16, 4-17
option settings ...............................................................11-2
T I
P
TCP/IP settings .............................................................3-14
Page Explorer .................................................................2-4 Toolbar ...................................................................4-33, 9-4
page subroutines ..........................................................4-55 Toolbox ...........................................................................2-5
pages ..............................................................................1-4 trend graph ...................................................................5-18
PDF file .........................................................................5-12
popup pages .................................................................4-23 U
properties ........................................................................5-5
updating device variables ...............................................3-6
R user alarm .....................................................................5-14

recipe ............................................................................5-24 V
recipes .................................................................. 1-9, 4-42
registering IAGs ............................................................9-13 variables .........................................................................4-3
Replacing the Font Family ............................................4-66 VNC ..............................................................................10-2
reset ..............................................................................3-32 VNC settings .................................................................3-18
Reset Default Value ......................................................4-32
Resetting the Font Settings to the Default Settings ......4-68 W
Resource Usage ...........................................................4-82
resources ....................................................... 1-9, 4-49, 9-9 Watch Tab Page ..............................................................7-3

NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118) I-3

 Index

I-4 NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (V118)

OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN Contact : www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters

OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC

Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31) 2356-81-300 Fax: (31) 2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900 Fax: (1) 847-843-7787

OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. ©OMRON Corporation 2014-2023 All Rights Reserved.
438B Alexandra Road, #08-01/02 Alexandra Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
Technopark, Singapore 119968 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Tel: (65) 6835-3011 Fax: (65) 6835-3011 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-6023-0333 Fax: (86) 21-5037-2388 Cat. No. V118-E1-25 0723